JP7148145B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired when the acquisition condition is established, and based on the result of the determination, the variable effect of the effect symbols is displayed as an image. Machine-running is common.

In such a game machine, there are a plurality of types of variation patterns for the variable performance of the performance symbols, and selection is made from among the plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result, and the variation performance of the performance symbols in the selected variation pattern is displayed as an image. It was displayed on a display device (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2017-018225 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is room for improvement in the aspect of the variable effect of the effect symbols, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, it is possible to acquire determination information when a starting condition is established, and execute a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. a main control means (main CPU 110a), a storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the special game judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.) Detecting means for detection (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) and display means (image display devices 70, 71) in accordance with signals from the main control means. In the gaming machine comprising a production control means (production control board 130), the main control means performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and the production The control means, in the variable effect, the effect pattern (the effect pattern 70a) is recognizable, and the recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is in progress. Period (for example, the period during which all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (the period during which the temporary stop is displayed before the main stop display, the period during which the temporary stop is displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect), when the ready-to-win is established, the normal ready-to-win effect middle, etc.) and a second period (during main stop display, during derived display) during which the stop display mode (main stop display, derived display) in which the production pattern is stop-displayed can be executed. When executing the first variation production that performs the first specific production (normal fluctuation, normal reach production, etc.), and the second specific production (SP reach production, The execution time of the first period can be controlled to be different from the case of executing the second variable production that performs the SPSP ready-to-win production, etc.), and during the first period when the second variable production is executed. 141(a), 141(e), the first effect of a predetermined mode (any of the fluctuation end suggesting effects, the predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, the effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(c) (f) production pattern 70a returned to the normal size, etc.) and a second production in a mode different from the first production (any fluctuation end suggesting production, predetermined production pattern 70a 141 (a) (e), the production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (c) (f) is displayed in a normal size, etc.) And, the first reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in the first display mode, and the reservation memory as the first display mode can display second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) displayed in a different second display mode, and shift display of the second pending information according to the decrease in the pending memory It is possible to execute a normal update display (see FIGS. 97(d)(e), 100(d)(e), etc.) for sequentially decreasing and displaying the second pending information one by one, and the second specific effect When the reserved memory increases during execution, the display of the increase from the first memory number (for example, 1) to the second memory number (for example, 2) in the first reservation information is executed, but the The display of the increased number from the first stored number to the second stored number in the second hold information is not executed until a predetermined condition (end of SP reach (SPSP reach) effect) is established in the first period, If the main control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) etc.), and while displaying the second pending information of the third stored number (for example, three) that is two or more more than the first stored number (FIG. 97(g), FIG. 100 ( g), etc.), when receiving a signal at the start of the variable production (special figure reservation number designation command, production design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) in which the reservation memory becomes the first memory number (See FIG. 97(h), FIG. 100(h), etc.), a specific update display that displays the decrease from the third stored number to the first stored number in a decreasing manner different from the normal update display. (See FIG. 97(i), FIG. 100(i), etc.) can be executed, and in the specific update display, the second pending information is set to a number that is one less than the third storage number. The shift display is performed so that the first stored number is obtained without the shift display .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of a special design. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 1-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a 2-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for abnormal conditions. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between icon display modes and notification sounds when icons are generated (changed). It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect production scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit advance notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 37; It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 46; It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/driving control part. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing origin return processing in a lamp/drive control unit; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp/drive control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the icon change effect and the lamp change effect are restarted after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 72; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 74; It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/driving control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. 1 is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally; It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 1. FIG. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally; It is the example 1 of the production|presentation in the various timing of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is an example 2 of production at various timings of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. 3 is an example 1 of production at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 3 is a production example 2 at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 4 is timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 4. FIG. 5 is timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 6. FIG. 7 is timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 8. FIG. This is a modified example 1 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 2 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 3 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 4 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 5 in which the command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of each fluctuation production|presentation. It is a figure showing a mode that change production|presentation is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that change production|presentation is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that change production|presentation is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that change production|presentation is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that change production|presentation is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that change production|presentation is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that change production|presentation is performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the display mode in the case of displaying in the normal reach mode in the first display mode; It is a figure explaining the transition of the display mode when SP ready-to-win production is performed. It is a figure explaining the transition of the display mode at the time of displaying in the non-reach mode in the 1st display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of a fluctuation end suggestion production. It is a figure explaining another example of a fluctuation end suggestion production. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect when displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect when displayed in a non-reach mode in the first display mode; It is a figure explaining an example of revival production when SP ready-to-win production is performed. FIG. 10 is another example of the change end suggesting effect, and is a diagram for explaining one example; FIG. 10 is another example of the change end suggesting effect, and is a diagram for explaining one example; FIG. 10 is another example of the change end suggesting effect, and is a diagram for explaining one example; FIG. 10 is another example of the change end suggesting effect, and is a diagram for explaining one example; FIG. 10 is another example of the change end suggesting effect, and is a diagram for explaining one example; FIG. 10 is another example of the change end suggesting effect, and is a diagram for explaining one example; FIG. 10 is another example of the change end suggesting effect, and is a diagram for explaining one example; It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation end suggestion production|presentation in the production|presentation design 5470a. It is a diagram illustrating a low-probability variation pattern table, which is a variation pattern table in a low-probability gaming state. It is a diagram illustrating a high probability variation pattern table, which is a variation pattern table in a high probability gaming state. It is a diagram exemplifying a small hold fluctuation pattern table, which is a fluctuation pattern table when the number of holds is small. It is a diagram exemplifying a multi-holding fluctuation pattern table, which is a fluctuation pattern table when the number of holdings is large. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1P with the outer frame 10, the game board unit 12P, and the inner frame 14P opened. It is a rear view of the game board unit 12P. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 12P. They are (a) a perspective view, (b) a rear view, and (c) a right side view of the assembly 2P. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly 2P; FIG. 11 is a left side view showing how the substrate case 3P is assembled to the base 20P; It is (a) a perspective view, (b) a rear view, and (c) a right side view of the substrate case 3P. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a substrate case 3P; FIG. FIG. 4A is a rear view and FIG. 4B is a front view of a sealing body 4P in which an outer case 45P and an inner case 40P are combined; 154 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45P of the circuit board case 1003 according to the modification, taken along line AA in FIG. 153. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45P of the circuit board case 1103 according to the modification, taken along line AA in FIG. 153. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45P of the circuit board case 1203 according to the modification, taken along line AA in FIG. 153. FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of a substrate case 1303 according to a modified example; FIG. 159 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1303 taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 15 is a rear view of a board case 1551 according to a modified example; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 as seen from an angle where the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the ROM 502; FIG. 21 is a rear view of a board case 1700 in which a control board 1705 according to the fifth embodiment is housed; (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a seal portion 1710, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a date mark portion 1720. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the unsealing prevention seal portion 1730, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the unsealing prevention seal portion 1730 is attached to the substrate case 1700. FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display configuration of an information display device 1750. FIG. FIG. 10 is a table for explaining the contents displayed on the information display device 1750 and the display form regarding the performance display of the gaming machine 1P; FIG. FIG. 11 is a table for explaining the contents displayed on an information display device 1750 and the display form regarding the setting display of the gaming machine 1P; FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display portion 1791 of a substrate case 1790 according to a modification, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display portion 1796 of a substrate case 1795 according to a modification. FIG. 18 is a rear view of a board case 1803 in which a control board 501 according to the seventh embodiment is housed; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a state in which an electronic component 595 is viewed obliquely from above through a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561; It is the (a) top view of the transparent socket 1801, (b) a side view. 171 are cross-sectional views (a) to (d) of substrate cases 1805 to 1808 at positions corresponding to line CC in FIG. 170. FIG. 171 are cross-sectional views (a) and (b) of substrate cases 1809 and 1810 at positions corresponding to line CC in FIG. 170. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a special position display section 541; FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram of one method of reducing the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560; It is a typical rear view of the case part 1813 which accommodated the prize ball board|substrate 1811. FIG. It is a typical rear view of the case part 1823 which accommodated the production|presentation board|substrate 1821. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of assembly 2P, in which control board 501 is provided with first region 1900a and second region 1900b.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a game machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball put out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper receiving tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower receiving tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later without being able to enter the upper receiving tray 11, and game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations in the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

The upper receiving tray 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper receiving tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper tray 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation to the production button 17, and a production button. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 2) having a button driving motor for vertically moving the button 17 is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

A lending/returning operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper receiving tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game balls. is performed, and when a return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper receiving tray 11 and the lower receiving tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper receiving tray 11 and guiding them to the lower receiving tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the game ball payout by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. It is By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner. A blowing port 15d is formed at the front end of the steering wheel light emitting device 15c to serve as a blowing port for blowing wind (air) from a blower device 21, which will be described later.

On the back side of the glass frame 4, a blower 21 for blowing out wind (air) in a predetermined manner is provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13. As shown in FIG. The blower 21 includes a blower (not shown) for blowing out wind (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower. ) passes through the base 14 of the shooting operation device 13 and the interior of the handle light emitting device 15c, and is delivered from the blower port 15d toward the player's hand. By activating the blower 21, it is possible to execute a blow effect in which wind (air) is sent out in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player who is operating the shooting handle 15.例文帳に追加

The air blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the shooting operation device 13, but is provided around the decoration plate 2b of the outer frame 2 and the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4, etc., so as to blow air (air) toward the player. ) may be sent out. Also, a plurality of air blowers 21 may be provided.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The game ball shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the hitting member 28, and a shooting member 28 directed toward the lower left end of the game board. A shooting rail 29 that slopes upward and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a shooting position that is the lower end of the slope of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the interior of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which a game ball can always win a prize (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). The balls are put out to the upper tray 11 as balls.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (assisting game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray as prize balls. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) for a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Directly below the first starting port 45, a game ball from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) that allows or facilitates winning (entering a ball).

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) are provided. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is designed to be dispensed onto the upper receiving tray 11 . In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, there is provided a prize winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform lighting effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal pattern gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery) A variable winning portion 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 2), an opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has entered (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls to the upper tray. 11 will be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A winning ball flow path 52 (not shown) is provided for receiving and collecting game balls detected by the second starting opening detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a and allowing them to flow down.

Also, in the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a (see FIG. 2) is provided for detecting a game ball flowing down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches. This winning confirmation detection switch 52a is used to re-detect game balls after being detected by the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, and the big winning opening detecting switch 50a. It is used to determine whether it was a proper winning (ball winning) or an abnormal winning (ball winning).

Outside the game area 5a, there are a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, and a second special symbol display device. symbol hold indicator 64; A holding display device consisting of a normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, and a jackpot game (special game state) described later A main information display device 59 consisting of a right-handed indicator 67 (see FIG. 2) is provided to prompt the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a during the game state) or during the time-saving game state.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is used to display (notify) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery with the first special symbol is obtained by acquiring a random number for judging a big hit (judgment information) when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the obtained random number for judging a big hit and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot lottery is obtained by acquiring a jackpot judgment random number value (judgment information) when a game ball enters the second start port 47, and acquiring the jackpot judgment random number value and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. It should be noted that when the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big win lottery.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), jackpot game (special game state) It refers to the state in which the right to execute is acquired. A "jackpot game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game state)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol that is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45 (first special symbol It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (the second special symbol) is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when a jackpot lottery with a special pattern is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state, the right-handed player urges to shoot the game ball toward the right gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting). It is for displaying a beating display, and the LED lights up during a big win state (special game state) and a time saving game state.

In the lower right part inside the game area 5a, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-handed display 87 that prompts to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination, and the second sub-variation display 82 displays the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination. They are for (notifying), and are each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp pattern LZ or the second lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, a big win. The result of the judgment (lights up in the case of a big hit, lights out in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82, it blinks and stops while the special symbols are being varied, so that only whether or not the special symbols are being varied is displayed. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the second sub-reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). , each of which is composed of two left and right LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storage (number of reservations), and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for displaying a right-handed display prompting to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right-handed hitting), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the production space 40a.
In this embodiment, the "first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)" and the "second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal)" may be collectively referred to as "image display device".

The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) display various effects according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demonstration effect executed when the special symbol is not variably displayed, a variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed when the special symbol is variably displayed, and a notice by the character. There are performances, etc.

In addition, the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), during the execution of the variable display of the production pattern 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the board drive composed of solenoids, motors, etc. A moving effect can be performed by moving with a device 75 (see FIG. 2).

Specifically, the standby position (first position) located near the end (below) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the center (above) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) A movement effect is performed by moving (up, down) in the vertical direction between the effect position (second position) located at . The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured such that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 .

In addition, the display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. By scrolling the displayed production design 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the production design 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed corresponding to (synchronization with). That is, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

In the stop display of the performance symbol 70a, the performance symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big win mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big win lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, various production images such as a reach production, a background image, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second display according to the result of the big winning lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the occurrence of a big win (special game state) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is heightened.

Here, the ready-to-win effect means that a part of the combinations of the effect patterns 70a for informing the big win is temporarily stopped, and the other effect patterns 70a fluctuate, giving the player a sense of anticipation for winning the big win. It means variation mode. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for notifying a big hit, two performance symbols 70a are set in the left and right regions. 7" is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In addition, in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a special effect symbol variable display area for variably displaying three rows of special effect symbol TZ is formed. By scrolling the TZ in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ is performed.

In the special effect symbol variable display area, the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. The variable display of the special effect symbol TZ is stopped corresponding to the stop of the variable display of .
That is, the variable display of the special effect pattern TZ is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the first special pattern or the , the execution state of the variable display of the second special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player.

Incidentally, the special effect pattern TZ, like the effect pattern 70a, is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9". It is designed to stop for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big win mode, etc.) showing the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same special effect pattern TZ such as "777" or a combination of special effect patterns TZ with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is that. It is an aspect other than this.

In the present embodiment, the special effect symbol TZ is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but is not limited to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and can be displayed on the second image display device. It may be displayed on 71 (sub liquid crystal). Alternatively, the image may be displayed on both the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the display.

In addition, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), in order to display the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special figure pending number (U1), which is the number of the current first pending storage The first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special figure pending number (U2) which is the number of the current second pending storage Then, the icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special figure pending number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of first special figure reservations (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display the number of second pending icons corresponding to the number of second special figure pending (U2). That is, the number of second reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special figure reservation number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two The second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display section 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second When the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and when the variable display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TH disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first reserved icon", the "second reserved icon", and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

Also, the first special figure reservation number for displaying the first special figure reservation number indicating the current first special figure reservation number (U1) at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) A display area 70E and a second special figure reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the current second special figure reserved number (U2) are formed.

In addition, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and the second reservation number displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F correspond to the first reservation information, The first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D correspond to the second pending information and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon in question corresponds to the execution information.

The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is vertically moved between a standby position (origin position) located above and a production position located below by the driving force of the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform a performance action by moving to , and the fact that it is at the origin position is detected by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. By the driving force of the second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2), the position between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the production position located on the lower left It is possible to perform a performance action by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the rendering positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they do not conflict with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, after one movable member moves to the rendering position, it returns to a position that does not overlap with the rendering position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the performance position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game ball payout device 100 for putting out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island facilities, etc. A game ball storage unit 101 (not shown) that stores game balls to be supplied and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main controller 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game. ), a payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and an effect control command from the main control board 110 A production control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a production control board 130 for controlling production in response to and a power supply device 160A (not shown) incorporating a power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It has a chip microcomputer, an input port for main control, and an output port. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling the controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detecting switch 43a, a gate detecting switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a large winning opening detecting switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a. , magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RAM clear switch 55a, payout control board 120, etc. are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display). device 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), game information output terminal board 90, and A performance control board 130 and the like are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 for driving the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 for driving the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing relating to the payout of game balls, thereby providing a game ball payout device. 100, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. etc. are connected, and the output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 .

When receiving a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control a predetermined number of game balls to be put out. When it is detected that a predetermined number of game balls have been put out, control for putting out game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display/sound control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, handle light emitting device 15c, button driving device 17b, and board A lamp/driving control unit 150 for controlling the lighting device 76, the board driving device 75, etc., and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

The sub CPU 130a reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b upon receiving an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to an input signal from the effect button detection switch 17a or the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display/sound control unit 140, lamp/driving control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects ( output data or commands).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected to the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or control the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 having an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a VDP (image processor). a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like; and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. a VRAM 147, an audio controller 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored, an input/output port and the like.

The supervising CPU 142 reads out the display control program stored in the supervising ROM 143 in response to the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the supervising RAM 144 as a work area. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, the image control unit 145 and the sound control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (output data and commands).

The overall ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM and the like, and includes a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a drawing control command group, and an animation of a production pattern. An animation pattern for the purpose, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the image presentation, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method , the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a performance design image, a background image constituting the background of the performance design. , character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 146 also stores palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub It has a frame buffer area etc. corresponding to liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). , the drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it outputs to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

General-purpose controllers for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting them are provided between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). A substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying image data. For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device with XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/driving control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the production. Controls (outputs data and commands) are performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects in accordance with the received effect instruction commands and the like.

The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/driving control section. 130m (sub CPU 130a) based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 76, and various LEDs of the sub information display device 80 , and drive control of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the button driving device 17b and the board driving device 75 to perform motion effects (moving effects described above).

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, It is supplied to the production control board 130 and various electronic parts). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, it has a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state" as the state related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the state related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 "non-time-saving game state” and “time-saving game state”.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “non-short-time gaming state” (2) A low-probability short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “short-time gaming state” (3) “ High probability game state "and" time saving game state "high probability time saving game state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state", and this game state is referred to as the "normal game state ” will be called. In addition, in the present embodiment, "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because it is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. . In addition, it is possible to provide a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a "high-probability gaming state" and a "non-time-saving gaming state" and include the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in the "specific game state".

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" means that in the special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, A game state in which the winning probability is set as low as, for example, 1/299. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as 1/59.8, for example. . Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". It should be noted that the change from the low probability gaming state to the high probability gaming state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed.

In this embodiment, the big hit that triggers the transition to the high probability game state is called "probability variable big hit". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the normal pattern hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average variation of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the "time-saving game state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result A game state that is set shorter than the "non-time-saving game state" and is set longer than the "non-time-saving game state", for example, 2.5 seconds for the opening time of the second start port 47 when the winning is won. say. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127. /128 is set high. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. is set to However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. . In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

(type of jackpot)
Next, the types of jackpots will be described.

In the present embodiment, "first jackpot", "second jackpot" and "third jackpot" are used as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45. It has "first big win" and "second big win" as the types of big wins that can be won in the big win lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47.例文帳に追加

"First jackpot" means that the first jackpot game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big prize mouth 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. It's a big hit. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the high-accuracy short-time game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

“Second jackpot” is a jackpot that executes a second jackpot game in which round games are executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability short working hours game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" is a jackpot that executes the third jackpot game in which the round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

In addition, the number of times of fluctuation display (in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as "high probability It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots are used, but the number of types is not limited to three, and may be less or more than three types. In addition, the opening time of the opening and closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds for any jackpot (first jackpot to third jackpot), but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, and depending on the round game Different open times may be used.

(type of hit)
Next, the types of hits will be explained.

In this embodiment, there are "first win" and "second win" as types of wins that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44, and the winning lottery is executed. If the game state when the lottery is executed is the non-time-saving game state, it becomes "first win", and if the game state when the winning lottery is executed is the time-saving game state, it becomes "second win".

The "first win" is a win for executing the first winning game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

"Second win" is a win to execute a second winning game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. . That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In addition, in the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a prescribed number (for example, 10) of game balls enters the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

Thus, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can enjoy the game without consuming the game ball than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to proceed.

(Variation pattern determination table for special symbols)
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for determining variation patterns of special symbols, as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the variation pattern determination table is divided for each special symbol (special symbol stop data). Each table is associated with a random value for reach determination, a number of reserved special symbols (U1 or U2), a random value for special symbol fluctuation, a special symbol variation pattern, and a special symbol variation time. Random numbers for reach determination and random numbers for special figure fluctuations are allocated to each selection rate (%) shown in FIG.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" defines at least the determination result of the big hit and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, when a big win is made, the ready-to-win game is always performed.

Also, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The variation time (T2) of variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) is set to be shorter than the variation time (T1) of pattern 2. For example, the variation time (T1) of variation pattern 1 (normal variation) is set to 12 seconds, and the variation time (T2) of variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) is set to 3 seconds. Although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the reserved number of special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined after subtracting 1 from the reserved number of special symbols. Therefore, "4" will not be referenced as the pending number.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 3, special symbol stop data, special symbol reservation number (U1 or U2), reach determination random value, and special symbol variation random value. Based on, the variation pattern of the special symbols and the variation time of the special symbols are determined.

Then, based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E3H", it indicates a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the first special symbol display device 60 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 45, and the MODE data When it is "E4H", it indicates the special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol display 61 corresponding to the game ball winning in the second starting port 47.

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the effect contents such as the effect symbol 70a are determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern designation command). In the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 3, the effect contents of the effect symbol 70a are described for reference.

Here, "normal fluctuation" and "shortened fluctuation" as the content of the production mean that the plurality of production patterns 70a fluctuate at high speed and stop without reaching the ready-to-win state. The shortened variation is different in that the shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than the normal variation.

In addition, "normal reach" is a state in which the background image before becoming the normal reach is displayed, two production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one production pattern 70a is displayed in the central area. It is a variable reach production. In addition, in the present embodiment, although the "normal reach" does not result in a big win, the "normal reach" may be used to achieve a big win.

In addition, "SP reach" is a movie with a longer time than the movie related to the normal reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right regions, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a in the central region being changed. It is a reach production that flows videos, animations, etc.).

In addition, "SPSP reach" means that two production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one production pattern 70a is kept fluctuating in the central area for a longer time than the movie related to the SP reach production (feature). ) is a reach effect in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) flows.

In addition, "full rotation reach" is a reach effect that varies at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In this embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

The degree of expectation for winning a jackpot related to the content of the performance increases in the order of normal fluctuation (shortened fluctuation)<normal reach<SP reach<SPSP reach<full rotation reach (big hit confirmed).

(Preliminary judgment table for jackpot lottery)
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance.

As shown in FIG. 4, the preliminary determination table includes a special symbol indicator (type of starting port), a special symbol determination random value, a big hit symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, and a special symbol variation random value. Numerical values are associated with starting winning information, and each random number is distributed so as to have each selection rate shown in FIG.

Here, "big hit" or "loss" can be determined in advance by the special symbol determination random number obtained when the game ball enters the starting hole, and the type of special game can be determined by the big hit symbol determination random number. , The presence or absence of transition to the high probability game state can also be determined in advance.
In addition, since it is possible to determine in advance the contents of the production (whether or not reach occurs, the type of reach) etc. by the random value for reach determination and the random value for special figure fluctuation, start winning information (starting entrance winning designation command DATA) can define the type of jackpot and the content of the performance (planned variation pattern).

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 4, and displays special symbol indicators (types of starting ports), special symbol determination random numbers, jackpot symbol determination random numbers, ready-to-win determination random numbers, and special symbols. "Start winning information" is determined based on the variable random number value. Then, based on the determined starting winning prize information, a starting opening winning designation command for judging the result of the jackpot lottery in advance is generated.

This starting point winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 45 is indicated, and when the MODE data is "E7H", the second It shows the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the starting opening 47 .

The advance determination table shown in FIG. 4 is similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. However, the advance determination table shown in FIG. 4 is used when the game ball enters the start hole, whereas the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 3 is used when the special symbol variation starts. ing. In addition, there is a difference in whether or not to refer to the "holding number".
Therefore, in the advance determination table shown in FIG. 4, it is possible to distinguish the type of jackpot and reach, but it is impossible to distinguish between "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation"(" Start winning prize information 1”).

In addition, although the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 4 is a pre-determination table for a big win lottery that is referred to in the low-probability gaming state, the pre-determination table for a big win lottery that is referred to in the high-probability gaming state is also included, although not shown. It is stored in the main ROM 110b.
It should be noted that the jackpot lottery pre-determination table referred to in the high-probability gaming state is configured in the same manner as the pre-determination table shown in FIG. The value of the random number for special design determination is different.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing main processing of the main control board 110 .

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initialization processing in step S10. Specifically, when the power is turned on, a boot program is read from the main ROM 110b and processing for initializing flags and the like stored in the main RAM 110c is performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random number value. An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, in step S40, the main CPU 110a determines whether power failure (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S20 to detect power failure. If a signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S41.

In step S41, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts. In step S42, the output port is cleared. In step S44, a process of turning ON a backup flag to be referred to when recovering from a power failure is performed. In step S45, a process of prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. Wait until it drips.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as update processing of the special symbol time counter, opening time of the special electric accessory, etc. , update processing of normal symbol time counter, update processing of opening and closing time of movable member 48, and other time control processing for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a special symbol, a random number for determining a special symbol variation pattern, a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing for updating the random number used. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The random value is newly updated by setting the initial value random value to be used as a new cycle initial value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for judging a big win, the initial random value for determining a special symbol, the initial random value for determining a hit determination, and the initial random value for determining a normal symbol in step S130. Initial value random value update process to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, and the like. Input control processing is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to each switch, and to set predetermined data if there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (jackpot determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening/closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), special symbol special electric control for controlling the game state, and the like. process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a carries out normal pattern memory determination (hit determination, etc.), display control of normal symbols, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. .

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or controls a prize ball counter (three prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), and perform payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. A magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the production control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b to output. Winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63 and A data creation process for creating data such as special symbol reservation display data to be output to the second special symbol reservation display 64 and normal symbol reservation display data to be output to the normal symbol reservation display 65 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol reserved display data and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Also, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 10 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (10 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for winning balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and then the normal winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter for the big winning hole (15 winning ball counter) used for winning balls. 1 is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered into the winning hole and updated (D←D+1) to determine whether the current game state is the special game state. determine whether When the current game state is the special game state, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the big winning opening 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1). , ends the big winning opening detection switch input process.

If the current game state is not the special game state, the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning hole (second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) outside the winning period. The counter (E) is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (for example, 10), resulting in fraudulent winning. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is assumed that the fraudulent prize winning (illegal prize winning) occurs outside the winning period, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is specified. Set the command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the large winning opening. End switch input processing. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting port detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting port detection switch input processing shown in FIG. 8, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the gate detection switch input processing is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the normal figure reservation number is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

If the number of reserved patterns is less than 4, add "1" to the number of reserved patterns and update the random number for determining the hit, the random value for determining the normal pattern, and the random value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, the vacant storage parts are sequentially retrieved from the first storage part in the normal symbol holding storage area, the acquired random number value is stored in the vacant storage part, and the gate detection switch input processing is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs winning confirmation detection switch input processing in step S260. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52 or not. If the detection signal is not input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process is terminated.

When a detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the value of the winning ball counter (D) is updated by subtracting "1" (D←D-1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) reaches the upper limit value ( For example, 20) and the lower limit (eg -10).

If the value of the winning ball counter (D) does not fall within the range between the upper limit and the lower limit, it is assumed that an abnormal winning (ball winning) has occurred, and an error designation command for abnormal winning is sent to the transmission data storage area for performance. External information data (output data) for outputting an abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the winning ball counter (D) is cleared, and a winning confirmation detection switch is set. End input processing. In addition, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning performs abnormal winning error notification to notify that an abnormal winning has occurred.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( Random number for jackpot determination, random number for special pattern determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the winning ball counter (D), which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening (balls entered), and updates it (D←D+1).

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number of first reservation memories stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, is less than four. . When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special figure pending number (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-7, the updated first special figure A first special symbol memory specifying command corresponding to the figure pending number (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for free storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and stores acquired special symbol determination information in the free storage unit. Remember.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure variation pattern determination random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S230-10, and if it is not in the non-time-saving game state, this first start opening detection switch input process is terminated.
Thus, if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, that is, in the time-saving gaming state, step S230-10 and step S230-11 are not executed, so during the time-saving gaming state, later based on the first start port The look-ahead effect to do is not executed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-10. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be determined and executed, is determined.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting port designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, and The first starting port detection switch input processing is terminated.

As a result, the first start opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 executes before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start opening designation command. It is possible to execute a pre-reading foretelling effect that executes a predetermined foretelling effect over one or a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In addition, for the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the first starting opening 45, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation storage, the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), 1st special symbol reservation number designation command, 1st preliminary determination process, 1st start opening designation command, respectively, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 2nd start opening 47, 2nd special design reservation storage area, 2nd reservation storage , 2nd special figure reservation number (U2), 2nd special figure reservation number designation command, 2nd advance decision processing, 2nd starting port designation command it should have read.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special electric processing data=0. Determination processing (step S310) If the processing is transferred to the special symbol change processing (step S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 special symbol stop processing (step S330), if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is moved to the big hit game processing (step S340), if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing goes to the jackpot game end processing (step S350) Transfer.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as will be described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. .

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing for determining a big hit, processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and processing for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more To determine whether the first special figure reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more (is "0") determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbols and the jackpot game are not executed is the start of the customer waiting state is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, and the customer waiting state specifying command is set in the transmission data storage area for performance, and the special special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. If the special pattern memory determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0", the customer waiting state has already started, and the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. This time's special symbol memory determination processing is terminated.

When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, in the second special symbol reservation storage area Various random numbers (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the second corresponding to the second special figure reservation number after subtraction (U2) 2 Set the special symbol memory specification command in the effect transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special design determination among various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage section to the 0th storage section of the second special design reservation storage area, and the current probability Based on the game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), it is determined whether it is a "jackpot" or a "losing" to execute a jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special figure reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, in the first special design reservation storage area After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random values stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage unit, A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after subtraction is set in the performance transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination among various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, and the current probability Based on the game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), it is determined whether it is a "jackpot" or a "losing" to execute a jackpot game.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol determination processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the value stored in the 0th storage unit A special jackpot pattern or a losing special pattern is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot pattern, and a performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is set in a transmission data storage area for performance.

In addition, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage section is determined. A special pattern (big win special pattern, losing special pattern) is determined based on the random number value, and a performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is set in a performance transmission data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols. Specifically, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the value stored in the 0th storage unit Based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for special figure variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the determined variation pattern A corresponding variation pattern specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area.

In addition, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination stored in the 0th storage unit The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number and the random number for special figure variation, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of special symbols in a predetermined processing area. .

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, data for lighting or extinguishing the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Variation display of the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is performed.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=0 is set to special symbol electric processing data=1, preparations are made to move to a subroutine of special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing for determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=1.

When the fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol determined in step S310 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 as a jackpot special symbol or a losing special symbol. , a predetermined special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the determination result of the big win determination.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=1 is set to special symbol electric processing data=2, preparations are made to move to a special symbol stop processing subroutine, and this special symbol variation processing is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing to determine whether or not the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). When the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of times of time saving > 0, the time saving number counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the number of times of time saving = 0, the time saving game flag is cleared, and when the number of times of high probability > 0, it is high. The probability number counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the high probability number=0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a jackpot special pattern, clear the time-saving game flag, high-probability game flag, time-saving number counter, and high-probability number counter, and set from special figure special electric processing data = 2 to special figure special electric processing data = 3 Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the special symbol stop processing of this time is finished.

On the other hand, if the special pattern is lost, the special pattern special electric processing data is set to 0 from the special special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special design storage determination processing, and the special design stop processing of this time is performed. exit.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a selects the first jackpot game, second jackpot game, or third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in step S310 (stopped symbol data). A jackpot game process is performed.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of round games (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (enter a ball) during this opening, or the opening time of the big winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10, or special game timer counter = 0), a large The drive data output of the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped, and the opening/closing member 51 is closed. This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game is completed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 16 times in this embodiment), the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 , the special figure special electric processing data is set to 4, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and the jackpot game processing of this time is finished.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines either the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state, and also determines the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. A jackpot game ending process is performed.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special design (stop design data) set in step S310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the number of time saving Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the big hit game end processing of this time is completed.

(Description of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 and 11 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

"First special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special figure reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set with "E0H", and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to

This first special symbol storage designation command is, when the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area increases or decreases, the above step S230-11 or the above step S310 after the increase or decrease in the pending storage A first special symbol memory specifying command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"Second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special figure reserved number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to

This second special symbol storage designation command is, when the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area increases or decreases, the above step S240 or the above step S310 to the number of pending storage after increase or decrease A corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" may be collectively referred to as "special symbol memory designation command".

"Production design designation command" indicates the type (kind) of the special design to be stopped and displayed. ” is set as “E2H”, and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. In addition, since the type of the special pattern ultimately determines the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot ends, the production pattern designation command can be said to indicate the jackpot type and the game state after the jackpot ends. .

When various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbols is started, the performance symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbols is transmitted to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310. , and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"First special symbol variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 60, "MODE" is set to "E3H", various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern specifying command is the first special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in step S310 when the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 60 is started. A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"Second special symbol variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol display device 61, "MODE" is set to "E4H", various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern specifying command is a second special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in step S310 when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 61 is started. A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern specification command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern specification command" may be collectively referred to as "variation pattern specification command".

The "special symbol determination command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "00H".

This special symbol determination command is used when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and the special symbol determination command is transmitted data for effect in the main RAM 110c in step S320. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol determination command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "01H".

When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the main RAM 110c in the above step S400 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. , and will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "starting entrance winning designation command" is information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance. " is set with "E6H", and if it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, "MODE" is set with "E7H", and DATA information is set according to various winning information. there is

This starting opening winning designation command, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, the starting opening winning designation corresponding to the starting winning information in the above step S230-10 or S240 A command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "jackpot opening designation command" indicates that various jackpot games (special game state) will start, "MODE" is set to "E8H", and DATA information is changed according to the type of jackpot game. is set.

As for this jackpot opening designation command, when various jackpot games are started, the jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330, and step S800. will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

The "round specification command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

As for this round designation command, when the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and the output control process of step S800 is performed. will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in.

The "jackpot ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have ended, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot game.

As for the jackpot ending designation command, when various jackpot games end, the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and step S800. will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

"Normal pattern storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storage stored in the normal number of reserved patterns (G1) storage area, "MODE" is set with "ECH", DATA according to the number of reserved storage information is set.

When the value stored in the normal design reservation number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, this normal design storage designation command is normal design corresponding to the reservation storage number after increase or decrease in the above step S250 or step S400 A storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "general pattern designation command" indicates the type of normal design to be stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 62, "MODE" is set to "EDH", and the information of DATA is normally set according to the type of design. is set.

When various normal patterns are determined and variable display of the normal patterns is started, the general pattern designation command corresponding to the normal patterns is transmitted to the main RAM 110c in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. , and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"General pattern fluctuation designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display device 62, "MODE" is set with "EEH", and information of DATA according to the fluctuation time of various normal patterns is set.

This general pattern fluctuation designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400 when the normal pattern fluctuation display is started. , is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"Opening designation command for winning" indicates that various auxiliary games are started, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

As for this winning opening specifying command, when the auxiliary game is started, the winning opening specifying command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and in step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

"Ending specification command for winning" indicates that various auxiliary games have ended, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

As for this winning ending specifying command, when various auxiliary games end, the winning ending specifying command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and step It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether it is a time-saving game state or whether it is a high probability game state, and "MODE" is set to "F0H", and " DATA" is set.

This game state designation command is set to the game state at the time of starting the variation of the special symbols, at the end of the variation of the special symbols (at the start of the jackpot game), and at the end of the jackpot, in the steps S310, S330, and S350. A corresponding game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power-restoration designation command" indicate whether power-on of the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is "F1H". "DATA" is set to "00H" when the main RAM 110c is initialized, and "DATA" is set to "01H to 03H" when the main RAM 110c is not initialized.

The power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command correspond to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized in step S10, and the power-on designation command corresponding to the gaming state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Alternatively, a power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed is set, and "MODE" is set to "F1H" and DATA is set to "04H". ing.

This customer waiting state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above step S310 when the customer waiting state where the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, and is set in the output control process of step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, and "MODE" is set to "F2H", and "DATA" information is set according to the error type.

This error designation command is issued when it is determined that a magnetic or radio wave abnormality has occurred in the magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process of step S600, or when an abnormal winning has occurred in the winning confirmation detection switch input process of step S260. , When it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred in the big winning opening detection switch input process of step S220 or the second start opening detection switch input process of step S240, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the main RAM 110c. and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

Also, when the payout control board 120 detects the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the fullness of the lower tray 12, or the payout abnormality, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is transmitted to the payout RAM 121c for effect. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120 .

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and "MODE" is set to "F2H", and information of "DATA" is set according to the type of error that has been resolved. is set.

This error cancellation designation command corresponds to the type of error that has been resolved when the payout control board 120 detects the closing of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the resolution of the fullness of the lower tray 12, or the resolution of the payout abnormality. A corresponding error cancellation designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120 .

(Main processing of production control unit 130m)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if the power-on designation command has been received, a process for performing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the power-on sound is output from the voice output device 9 .

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for performing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), A power restoration sound is output from the voice output device 9 .

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer-waiting state designation command has been received, and if the command has been received, processing for performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed is performed. conduct. Specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140, and a customer waiting demo screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , the voice output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 .

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received, and if received, the second stored in the sub-RAM 130c. 1 Special figure reservation number, 2nd special figure reservation number, normal design reservation number, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect process. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not the starting opening winning prize designation command or the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is received, and if it is received, the prefetching system production is performed. Processing related to icon change effect, continuous advance notice effect, and lamp change effect is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the pending icon and the icon. Note that, in the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing advance notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
"Lamp change effect" is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a performance design designation command, a special design variation pattern designation command, a special design decision command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command, etc. is received, and processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command if received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, whether the general pattern designation command, general pattern variation designation command, normal pattern determination command, opening designation command for winning, and ending designation command for winning, etc. are received It determines whether or not, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when it is received.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150. .

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. selects the demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 15) for determining the waiting time of Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 15, one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration is on standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, and if it is on standby for a demonstration, the demonstration standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not equal to 0, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not yet executed, and the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the present customer waiting effect processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. There are 4 types of demo standby time from 30 seconds to 80 seconds for the normal game mode, and 4 types of demo standby time from 35 seconds to 85 seconds for the specific game mode. is set.

A first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. Demonstration standby time after is displayed statically, demonstration standby time after the variable display of the production pattern is finished (variation time has passed) and the production design is statically displayed, and production design after the end of the customer waiting demo production is different from the demonstration standby time after is displayed still. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 15 is that the variable display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration standby time after the time has passed and the production pattern is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the effect pattern on the image display device immediately after is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demo standby time after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 15 is that the demonstration standby time after the static display of the effect symbol is displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect is the shortest. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As the sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
The look-ahead effect processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon). Execute processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lighting the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). Terminate the look-ahead effect processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received pre-reading designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. Also, if the received prefetch designation command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, the game state is normal, and the received prefetching designation command is based on the winning of the second start port 47. In the case, it may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of an icon to be additionally displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 18) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-9, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 19) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 19, a plurality of One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is displayed, or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

The final icon display mode determination table is associated with the type of start-point winning designation command, the random number for determining the icon display mode, and the final icon display mode to be selected, and the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. Random numbers for determining the icon display mode are assigned so that

The final icon display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons that indicate the possibility of a big win (a big win game will be played). icon is set.

The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon<) blue character icon<red character icon<rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms a big win. .

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 18, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the content of the effect. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the specific starting winning information indicating that the production content is SP reach or SPSP reach, it is determined that the production content is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not become reach. The character icon is selected at a higher rate than in the case of the normal starting prize information shown.

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 18, the CD icon is not selected as the final icon display mode in the event of a big win, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the starting point winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be selected. , as a reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode in the changes are described.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is the variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command. That is, "the variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the icon display mode is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing icon change effect execution processing in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E520-1, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern specification command has been received. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change effect execution processing is terminated.

In step E520-2, sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-reading information storage area of sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, determines whether there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). determine whether If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 21) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. , determines one pending icon change pattern.

In step E520-6, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 according to the change timing corresponding to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. Then, the display mode of the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. The process proceeds to step E520-11 assuming that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the inability to normally receive the time command (special figure pending number specification command, look-ahead specification command).

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, the A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 22) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are selected based on the mode of change of the icon in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not have been executed due to power restoration or command abnormality. Select the corresponding icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 23) for. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal conditions will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-12. Specifically, referring to the icon change pattern determination table for the selected abnormality, based on the variation pattern indicated by this special figure variation pattern specification command and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, One icon change pattern is determined from the plurality of icon change patterns, and the final display mode of the icon is also determined.

Sub CPU 130a determines in step E520-13 whether or not the icon change pattern is a change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon. If it is a changing pattern, the process proceeds to step E520-14, and if it is not a changing pattern (it is a non-changing pattern), the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 is changed according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. , the display mode of the icon displayed in the .

As described above, according to the icon change effect execution process shown in FIG. 20, when the power supply is restored or a command error (prefetching designation command is not received, etc.) occurs, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) may be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the icon change effect not being executed due to the restoration of the power source or the occurrence of command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the icon change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 20, the icon change effect is executed again in the fluctuation effect newly started after the power is restored (the special icon was changed to the special icon by the suspended icon change effect, but the normal icon is displayed by the power recovery). Even if the icon change effect is executed for the icon that has returned to the icon), the change scenario before the power restoration ( It is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs during the execution of the icon change effect, the suspended memory (special figure The icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory (special figure determination information) before the judgment information), and the icon change effect is performed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect. It may be executable.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the type of pending icon change pattern to be selected. As a reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the pending icon in each pending icon change pattern are described.

As for the hold icon change pattern, normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. , a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while fluctuating with the output of a sound effect, and when a character appears, an action effect that acts on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the mode changes and a change notification pattern (special pattern) indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variable effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the change notification pattern is used as a starting point to act on the reserved icon. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which an effect effect is performed to change the display mode of the pending icon.

The change effect generation timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and when the variable effect is started (at the start of the variable effect), during the execution of the variable effect (during fluctuation), and the effect pattern When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

In the change stage of the pending icon, there is a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode that is one step higher, and a jackpot icon. A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the display mode of the winning expectation to two levels higher.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referenced when determining the change pattern of the icon. FIG. FIG. 22B is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by two stages.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the type of icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes at the start of fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. There are set a change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which when a character appears, an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the change effect. When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and a jackpot icon. 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon, etc.) is set to change the display mode of the winning expectation to two levels higher.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Pseudo-continuous effect is as if multiple times of variable display of the effect pattern is executed for the big hit determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. In order to make it look as if it was done, within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (entering the ball) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47), all production It is a variable display of a performance symbol in a special mode in which a re-variation display in which the symbol 70a temporarily stops and then starts to vary again is performed once or more times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relevant icon change pattern determination table for abnormal times)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an icon change pattern determination table for an abnormal situation, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

In the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal times, the change pattern indicated by the special figure change pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the icon change pattern to be selected, and the icon to be selected , and for reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

Note that the icon change pattern includes a non-change pattern in which the icon change effect is not executed. Since it is the same as that explained in the change pattern determination table for icon, the explanation here is omitted.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon occurs (changes))
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated. A second generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when an icon is generated (changed). A third generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of change), and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of icon change. is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types). , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon. Alternatively, when the CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes in any manner. You may make it output. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types of special change notification sounds may be provided.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step E530-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present time is the period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed. If it is during the look-ahead zone effect executable period, the process moves to step E530-4, and if it is not the look-ahead zone effect executable period, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E530-6.

"Look-ahead Zone Effect" refers to zone-in-zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background image, display of blue zone image or red heat zone image, output of zone BGM or heat zone BGM) during one or more variable effects. It is an effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by performing it with a background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a type of continuous advance notice effect.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead zone effect'' means that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed in the preceding hold, the jackpot game is not being executed, and the look-ahead designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the second start port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) etc. mentioned.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 26) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone effect. Details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead zone rendering scenario in step E530-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 26, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each production scenario Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E530-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the continuous announcement effect execution process of step E540 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is the look-ahead effect rendering executable period. If it is during the look-ahead effect rendering executable period, the process proceeds to step E530-9, and if it is not during the look-ahead effect rendering executable period, it is determined that the look-ahead effect rendering based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to Step E530-11.

"Look-ahead effect production" means that a special game is executed by additionally displaying an effect image of a predetermined color (either blue, red, or rainbow color) around the production pattern 70a at the start of fluctuation in one or more fluctuation productions. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation to be made by color information (expected value information), and is a type of continuous advance notice production.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead effect presentation'' means that there is no pre-reading effect presentation to be executed in the preceding hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the look-ahead designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 has been received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the second start port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) etc. mentioned.

In step E530-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead effect rendering scenario determination table (see FIG. 27) for determining a look-ahead effect rendering scenario. Details of the look-ahead effect rendering scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead effect production scenario in step E530-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 27, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each production scenario Based on (%), one look-ahead effect presentation scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead effect presentation scenarios.

In step E530-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead effect rendering as a rendering scenario in which the look-ahead effect rendering is not executed.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead effect production scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead effect presentation scenario is referred to in the continuous announcement presentation execution processing of step E540 described above, and the processing for executing the look-ahead effect presentation is performed. When this process ends, the current continuous announcement effect determination process ends.

(Look-ahead Zone Production Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table referred to when determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario.

The look-ahead zone production scenario determination table contains the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the preview scenario for each look-ahead zone production, and the look-ahead to be selected. The advance notice scenario of the zone effect is associated, and for reference, the advance change in each notice scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" means that a normal zone effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is executed. Also, a heat zone effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of a heat zone BGM) with high expectations for a big win is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, and a scenario in which the zone effect is executed during the change without executing the zone effect during the preliminary change ( For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect presentation scenario determination table referred to when determining a look-ahead effect presentation scenario.

In the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the preview scenario for each look-ahead effect production, and the selected look-ahead The forewarning scenario of the effect presentation is associated, and for reference, the advance variation in each forewarning scenario and the presentation mode of the look-ahead effect presentation in the variation are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The "blue effect" means that a blue effect image is added to the production pattern 70a, and the "red effect" means that a red effect image is additionally displayed to the production pattern 70a. Note that the degree of expectation for a big win related to the effect image is higher in the order of blue effect<red effect.

The look-ahead effect production scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead effect production is not executed, and an effect image is not added to the production design 70a during the advance fluctuation and the effect is displayed in the production design 70a during the fluctuation. A scenario (for example, scenario 01) in which an image is additionally displayed, and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an effect is additionally displayed to the production pattern during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect (prefetch zone effect, prefetch effect effect) stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E540-3, the continuous announcement effect. is stored. If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if the advance notice scenario is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. FIG. hold number designation command, prefetch designation command) cannot be received normally, so that the scenario is not stored in the prefetch information storage area.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the pre-reading information storage area of the sub RAM 130c stores an advance notice scenario for executing the pre-reading zone effect. If the forewarning scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect is stored, the process is shifted to step E540-5, and if the effect scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect is not stored, the look-ahead zone is executed in the current variable effect. The processing is shifted to step E540-7 assuming that the effect is not executed.

In step E540-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead zone effect pattern (zone, heat zone) according to the preview scenario of the look-ahead zone effect, and in step E540-6, a look-ahead zone corresponding to the determined look-ahead zone effect pattern. Set the effect command in the transmission buffer. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control section 140 and the lamp/driving control section 150, and the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the pre-reading information storage area of the sub RAM 130c stores an announcement scenario for executing the pre-reading effect presentation. If the advance notice scenario for executing the look-ahead effect production is stored, the process is shifted to step E540-8, and if the production scenario for the execution of the look-ahead effect production is not stored, the look-ahead effect is executed in the current variable production. The current continuous announcement effect execution processing is terminated assuming that the effect is not executed.

In step E540-8, the sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead effect production pattern (blue effect, red effect) according to the preview scenario of the look-ahead effect production, and in step E540-9, a look-ahead effect production pattern corresponding to the determined look-ahead effect production pattern. Set the effect production command in the transmission buffer. As a result, the look-ahead effect rendering command is transmitted to the display/sound control section 140 and the lamp/driving control section 150, and the look-ahead effect rendering is executed.

In step E540-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects an alternative notice pattern for determining whether or not to execute an alternative notice effect as compensation for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to power restoration or occurrence of a command abnormality. A determination table (see FIG. 29) is selected to determine an advance notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the selected alternative notice pattern determination table, one alternative notice pattern is selected from among multiple alternative notice patterns based on the selection rate (%) of this variable effect pattern and each alternative notice pattern. decide. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

"Alternative notice effect" is a effect to compensate for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the power supply restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and the image display device shows which of the multiple mini characters with different expectations for big wins. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by displaying .

In step E540-11, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step E540-12, and if the alternative notice effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-12, the sub CPU 130a sets an alternative notice effect command corresponding to the alternative notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the alternative notice effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control section 140 and the lamp/driving control section 150, and the alternative notice effect is executed.

According to the continuous notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, when the effect scenario of the continuous notice effect is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power supply recovery or the occurrence of a command error (such as failure to fetch the look-ahead designation command), the process starts from now. It is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect without executing the continuous notice effect in the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with not executing the continuous announcement performance due to the restoration of the power supply or the occurrence of command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, when the power supply recovery (power failure) occurs during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is not restarted in the variable effect started after the power recovery. In addition, it is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous announcement effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding an alternative notice pattern.

The alternative notice pattern determination table is associated with the type of variation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern. The effect mode in the alternative notice pattern is described.

The alternative notice patterns include a pattern 00 in which no alternative notice effect is executed, a pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, a pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and a mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 is set in which a mini-character D is displayed on the image display device.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to mini-characters is higher in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is sure to win a big win.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29 is that an alternative notice effect is executed in a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot rather than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. One reason is that the pattern is easily determined. Therefore, the more likely the continuous announcement effect was executed before the power supply was restored or the command abnormality occurred, the more likely the alternative announcement effect was executed, thereby reducing the dissatisfaction associated with the termination of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect. The alternative notice pattern for executing the alternative notice performance is more likely to be determined than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension is executed. Therefore, after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, in the variable production that is executed after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it is decided whether or not to execute the jackpot announcement production (line announcement production, step-up announcement production), which will be described later. By increasing the execution probability of the jackpot announcement performance than usual, the alternative announcement performance may not be executed.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable to make it easier to execute the big hit announcement performance than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that is not set is executed. In this way, after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is to be executed. The scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power recovery or the command at the time of winning that will be cleared (special figure hold number specification command, look-ahead specification command) cannot be received normally. transfer processing.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR changes corresponding to the color change of the icon, thereby executing the lamp change effect. will be

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the ramp changing flag is set, the current ramp changing effect execution processing is terminated, and if the ramp changing flag is not set, the ramp changing flag is set at step E550-5. , ends the current ramp change effect execution processing.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

At step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, at step E550-8 sets a ramp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current ramp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/driving control section 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, synergistic effect with the icon change effect can enhance the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 30, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. or not to execute the alternative notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance is executed. You may do so.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 31, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m. is executed after the process of determining

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, the forewarning pattern of the big hit foretelling performance that makes the player expect that the big winning game will be executed. is selected, and the notice pattern is determined. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 32, a plurality of notice patterns (non-notice pattern ) is determined. Details of the jackpot announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a forewarning pattern for executing a dialogue forewarning effect. If it is the announcement pattern for executing the speech announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-4, and if it is not the announcement pattern for executing the dialogue announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Dialogue notice effect" means that, in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period that occurs during the variable effect, a dialog image suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device is displayed. It is a kind of jackpot announcement effect in which a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed (the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high) than when the jackpot game is not executed, the dialogue with the relatively high expectation is displayed. When a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the production button 17 vibrates, for example, for one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview effect, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, with reference to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from a plurality of dialogue patterns based on the jackpot determination result, the type of variation production pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the speech pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog preview effect command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the dialog preview effect corresponding to the dialog pattern is executed. is displayed, and audio corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9 .

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is shifted to step E650-7, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination processing is terminated.

“Step-up notice effect” is a jackpot notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until one of a plurality of steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is one kind. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the big win game is executed (higher expectation for the big win) than when the big win game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, referring to the step-up pattern determination table, one step-up pattern is selected from among a plurality of step-up patterns based on the jackpot determination result, the type of variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern. Decide on a step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current jackpot notice effect determination process. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up pattern is executed. Step images are displayed on the screen, and sound effects corresponding to the step images are output from the audio output device 9 .

(Jackpot notice decision table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a big win notice determination table referred to when deciding the notice pattern of the big win notice effect.

The jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected are associated with the jackpot notice determination table.

The notice pattern includes a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which a dialogue notice effect is executed, and a notice pattern in which a step-up notice effect is executed. The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is higher when the up notice effect is executed.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit 141)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control section 141. As shown in FIG.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the supervising CPU 142, and the supervising CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, in step T1, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step T2, performs initialization processing. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step T3, and refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 in step T4 to determine whether or not the effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130m. If it is not received, the process proceeds to step T7, and if it is received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command. Perform animation pattern setting processing.

The production instruction commands include a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

In addition, the animation group includes the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) for displaying the effect image, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are specified (specified) information such as parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a group formed by being

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying a pending icon or animation of the icon, and a variable production animation such as a background or character. , a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation for a special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the frame (to draw a new effect image). If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 performs display list generation/output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process, which will be described later, a drawing control command is set according to the content of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current frame number is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , but the opposite is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw the effect image based on the output display list. By executing this drawing command process, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is transferred to the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are displayed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound list generation/output processing for generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148. FIG.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9. When outputting a new sound, It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output sound based on the output sound list. By executing this sound output command process, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sounds based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP). Output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. may be stopped or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeated in a loop.

(Command Reception Interrupt Processing of Integrated Control Unit 141)
Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the command reception interruption process of the integrated control section 141, and the command reception interruption process is executed by receiving the production instruction command transmitted from the production control section 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs command reception processing for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. Specifically, the process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit 141)
V-blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt processing, display of one frame of effect image from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends (1/30 It is executed each time (1/30th of a second = approximately 33 ms) a V blank signal transmitted every second (approximately 33 ms) is received.

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( VDP), frame buffer switching instruction processing is performed to instruct switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 .

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms). will switch alternately.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has switched, and terminates the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. FIG. 36 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 37(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to.
Here, the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are omitted, but the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are displayed. is basically displayed in the same way as the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generated notification sound is the notification sound when the icon is generated. output is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". Along with the change, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation production by the normal variation pattern (variation display of special symbols) starts (start of customer waiting state 5th frame from ). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, the decreasing display of the first reserved number by non-animation, and the changing display (decreasing display) of the first reserved icon to the icon by animation are started. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". Along with the change, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special effect pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect The reduced display of the pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(e), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C. When the icon becomes TH, the reduction display of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the variable display in the center Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a state of being shaken) in the central variable display area, and is lost. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that there is a state is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "365" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the non-animated increase display of the reserved number and the reserved icon is the shortest one frame. Since the game ends in a period (time), it is possible to shift immediately to a variable presentation (decrease display of reserved numbers and change display of reserved icons) without being slowed down, thereby improving interest in the game.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon is output until the timing (frame update) after the timing (frame update) at which the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends. Since the game continues, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols is reduced (changed from "1" to "0"), the display of the number of reserved numbers decreased by non-animation and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing of completing the display of the decrease in the pending number (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the change display of the pending icon to the icon (frame update), the special symbol is reserved. While directing that the numbers change, the reserved number makes it easier for the player to grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next production pattern) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production starts after the reserved memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increased display of the reserved icon with non-animation, rather than the increased display of the reserved number Animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is changed. Either can be started first, as long as it is faster. By doing so, the degree of freedom of display control can be improved, and the fact that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased can be grasped at an early stage, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of starting the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon You may make it start the scrolling of the production|presentation design (update to the next production|presentation design) at the (frame update) timing of a little before completion.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 40. FIG. FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 40(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 39(a) to (c).
Here, the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are omitted, but the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are displayed. is basically displayed in the same way as the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first hold number and the increment display of the first hold icon with animation are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1 and the enlarged display is started. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the image is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases, the increase display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increase display by animation of the reserved icon are executed, so that the player can know that the number of reserved special symbols has increased. It is possible to reliably recognize the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the number of special symbol pending changes. While directing this, the player can easily grasp that the reserved number of special symbols has increased by the reserved number, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable performance, the increasing display of the reserved icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing of the end of the increasing display of the pending icon (frame update), so the number of special symbol pending The increase can be effectively produced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the suspended icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the suspended icon, the start of the variable effect is indicated. It can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, which may start first. By doing so, the increase in the number of reserved special symbols can be grasped at an early stage while the degree of freedom of display control is improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of pending items increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. FIG. 41 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 42(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG.
Here, the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are omitted, but the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are displayed. is basically displayed in the same way as the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the failure and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It's becoming In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special production pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first reserved number, the change display by the animation of the first reserved icon to the icon, and the animation of the first reserved icon Decrease display is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E is changed from "2" to "1". Change. In addition, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second icon displayed in the second display portion 70B2 1 pending icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special effect pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number is started, but since the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and notification when the icon occurs The output of the generated notification sound, which is a sound, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E is changed from "1" to "2". Along with the change, the reduction display of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the change display and decrease display of the first pending icon are finished. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and As the icon TH becomes the icon TH, the first reserved icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display of the production pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started. be.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (blink) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the change display of the reserved icon to the icon and the decrease display of the reserved icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed (frame update). Since the increasing display of the pending number is started even before the timing, the player can be made to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the changing display and decreasing display of the pending icon. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special pattern holdings increases during the execution of the change display of the holding icon to the icon and the decreasing display of the holding icon, the increase display of the holding icon and the output of the generated notification sound are put on standby (restricted). At the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so it is difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol holds. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number. good too.

Also, at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), instead of starting the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound (the start is delayed than usual), the change of the hold icon It is also possible to start the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound at the timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the display and the decreased display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special pending symbols increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are on standby (limited ), the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound can be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 44(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. .
Here, the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are omitted, but the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are displayed. is basically displayed in the same way as the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area move to the upper left of the screen. start moving and zooming out.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and scrolled in the center variable display area. The effect pattern 70a displayed is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen. A confrontation production is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first pending icon) is hidden together with the pending icon display area. Furthermore, the special effect symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a, and is in a ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first pending number is started, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the increment display of the first pending icon at this timing and when the icon occurs The generated notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E is changed from "1" to "2". Along with the change, the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not the jackpot is achieved) is being executed.
Here, although the illustration of the sub first pending display 83 is omitted, from the display mode showing "1" in the sub first pending display 83 as well as the first special figure pending number display area 70E The display mode changes to indicate "2".

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and an effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. ("777") that indicates a big hit, temporarily stop (become in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a that was displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (shaking state). become). Also, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.
In this way, the return display and the increase display of the hold icon when the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends are displayed without animation, so as shown in FIG. ) is not being executed), the increase display (recovery display) time is shorter than the increase display when the number of special symbol reservations increases.

Then, finally, the effect pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special effect pattern TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a, "777". Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even before the timing of the end of this specific effect (frame update), the number of reserved numbers Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the reserved icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific effect is completed (reduced display At the timing when the losing performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), the increase display of the reserved icon is started, so it is possible to prevent the transition of the special pattern reserved number from becoming difficult to grasp, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the pending icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special symbols increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of executing the increase display of the pending icon and the timing of executing the increase display, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult for the player to misunderstand that the player has done so, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the display of the increased number of reserved numbers is executed, and the execution of the increased display of the reserved icon is waited (restricted). It is preferable that the display of the increased number of pending icons be performed collectively in one frame at the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update).

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generated notification sound. good too.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
45 to 47, a specific example when the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease of the pending number before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 46(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to i).
Here, the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are omitted, but the sub-first suspension display 83 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are displayed. is basically displayed in the same way as the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(a), "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. ing. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TH is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable performances that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, a game ball is directed toward the right side area of the game area 5a. A right-hand shot image MU prompting the player to shoot is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon is generated Output of the generation notification sound is not performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E is changed from "1" to "2". Along with the change, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll.
Here, although the illustration of the sub first pending display 83 is omitted, from the display mode showing "1" in the sub first pending display 83 as well as the first special figure pending number display area 70E The display mode changes to indicate "2".

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left, middle and right variable display areas. A combination of performance symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started to show the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and during the "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and the predetermined advantageous period, The number of times the executed jackpot game is displayed as "jackpot x 1". Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(e), on the first image display device 70, characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls obtained (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped, and the special effect symbol TZ is displayed. is stopped and displayed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special production pattern TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the second reserved number, the change display of the second reserved icon to the icon by animation, and the reduced display of the second reserved icon by animation , non-animated return display of the first suspended icon and non-animated increase display of the first suspended icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F is changed from "4" to "3". Along with the change, the second pending icon (CD icon) H21 displayed in the first display portion 70D1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display The second pending icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed on the portion 70D4 start moving (shifting) to the adjacent display portion.
Thus, at the timing when the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state is completed and the first variable effect in the normal game state is started, the return display and the increase display of the first holding icon are non-animated. Since it is displayed, as shown in FIG. 42 etc., compared to the increase display when the number of special symbol reservations increases during the variable effect (when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is not being executed), the increase display (return display) is shorter.

Further, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special effect pattern TZ starts scrolling. In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the second pending icon are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47(h), in the first image display device 70, the second suspended icon H21 moved from the first display section 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and As the icon TH becomes the icon TH, the second reserved icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbols 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbols 70a are displayed in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

Thus, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increasing display of the first pending icon is waited (restricted), while the increasing display of the first pending number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the specific performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the number of the first special figure pending (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first pending icon at the timing when the specific game state (last variable effect in) ends (frame update). is started, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before is overlooked, the increase of the number of the first special figure reserved can be recognized, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, when starting to increase the display of the first reserved icon at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends, to perform the increased display of the reserved icon by non-animation completed in one frame, special symbol reservation Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of increasing the number and the timing of executing the increasing display of the pending icons, the sense of incompatibility of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special symbol at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generated notification sound It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next performance pattern) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of the first special figure reservation increases during the specific game state, while executing the increase display of the reservation number, the execution of the increase display of the reservation icon is waited (restricted), At the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update), the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase may be collectively performed in one frame.

Further, when the number of the first special figure pending increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Instead, only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during execution of the specific effect. , the icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F were set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71, or may be set (displayed) to a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. And, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the special symbol pending number by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display is started, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size before scrolling is started. Can be set. For example, it is possible to perform a motion in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction, or a predetermined motion of the character image (moving the character's arm, changing the character's facial expression, etc.) using the performance pattern 70a to which the character image is added. The production pattern 70a may be swayed left and right, the production pattern 70a may be added with an effect image or the like, or the production pattern 70a may be enlarged and displayed. Note that these effects correspond to the third effect.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. This processing is executed within a timer interrupt process executed by the lamp/drive control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Processing such as setting to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 48, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories. Operation processing is not executed at the same time. Therefore, the operation of returning various roles to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and it is possible to separate and check the return operation and the initial operation and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 48, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp/drive control unit)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp/drive control section 150 .

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the driven object to be returned to the origin is selected as the first. 1 movable member 73, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position. The board accessories abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets, in the lamp RAM 150c, return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven. , In step R105-10, clear the board accessory abnormality determination timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 is driven. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessories (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

At step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and at step R105-15, the effect button 17 is held within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return error has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, performs the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 49, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin positions at the same time (simultaneously), but are returned in a predetermined order (first movable member 74). member 73→second movable member 74) to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 49, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the production button 17) It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the return operation to . Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 49, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 49, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the production button 17) When both of the return operations to return to are completed, a process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the returning motion of various accessories to the origin position and the initial motion of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separate and confirm the returning motion and initial motion of various accessories. .

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are arranged to return to their origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). You may make it start the operation|movement which returns to. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various characters to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp/drive control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the movement pattern.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp is set in the RAM 150c The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Concretely, with reference to the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the lamp is set in the RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 50, the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. They can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 50, when there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessories, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 50, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 constituting the frame accessory, the initial operation of the production button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete breakdown or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 50, even if the initial action of the board role object in which the recovery error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the frame role object in which the recovery error has not occurred is executed. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 50, both the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. The initial operation process is terminated when the Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the production action, and it may occur that it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the production action. Gone.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent→return to origin→large descent→return to origin. , the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 does not operate, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→origin return, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent→origin return→large descent→origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 .
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The first movable member and the second movable member have the same operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Further, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the board accessories (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, they are different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is restored, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is made different, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the state is restored to the customer waiting state. good too. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. If the movable member 74 has no return abnormality, the second movable member 74 is initialized without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if the first movable member 73 has no return abnormality, the second movable member The point is that when there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED Lights up (lights up) in order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that it is in the state of waiting for customers is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED is turned off during that period.

It should be noted that the continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the production button 17 are executed by operating the production button 17 during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. The time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance (1 second vibrates in the case of the valid period for the big win notice to expect the big win, and 5 seconds in the valid period for the decision performance to notify whether or not the big win will occur). Second vibration) is different time.

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17) differs in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on performs an action that is not included in the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

A third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the luminous color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. This is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 where the detection of is performed. Therefore, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special effect symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". .

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special effect symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". .

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning is received, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation The first suspension icon is displayed in the icon display area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special effect symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". .

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning is received, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation The first suspension icon is displayed in the icon display area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special effect symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". .

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting). When the time elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device From 9, a winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E is "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device From 9, a winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E is "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished, and the image display device displays a return-in-progress screen containing the characters "Please restart the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving the special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) as a power ON command, the image display device displays the screen during recovery. A state is maintained in which the reserved number is not displayed in the 1 special figure reserved number display area 70E or the 2nd special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, the second When the initial motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T8, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ. A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the (static display) state is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. FIG.

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

In addition, when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the first sub-holding display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The flow of the basic operation from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 is the same, except that the variable effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command in .

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It will be in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen is displayed in a state in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 was set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command was received, a notification sound (alert, etc.) is output to indicate (make it possible to grasp) that the power has been turned on. You may do so. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power ON command cannot be received normally, the effect control board 130 is supplied with power, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power. There are a second case in which the command communication line to the substrate 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state). Case 3 will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation and the second pending number = 0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn off. maintain.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. The state is maintained, but the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to the display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (a production design designation command, a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the production design 70a of "753" which is the initial design at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ, the movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 65 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special production pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second The movable member LED and the production button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure The hold indicator 86) also maintains its display contents.

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect), the customer waiting state designation command When the demonstration standby time elapses after the reception or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration, the customer-waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. A first standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 issues an alarm and " RAM is cleared." is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
In FIG. 66, only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special production pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second The movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. The standby screen in which the shown effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the image display device displays the A second standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 67 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process is completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including characters "Please restart the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, Sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub normal figure reservation indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) ) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound “Don♪”. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, on the image display device, a confirmation screen in a state in which the performance symbol 70a such as "777", which is the jackpot performance symbol, and the special performance symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the first sub-variation display device is displayed. In 81, it becomes a big win display mode indicating that it is a big win.

At the timing of T11, when receiving a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E When it becomes "0", a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED will be in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. By adopting a mode, it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the production pattern 70a are not performed. , the variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 68 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right-hand hit is displayed on the upper right of the screen. A right-handed display image MG is displayed, and a jackpot special effect symbol TZ ("777") is stopped (statically displayed) at the bottom right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a big win including characters "Please restart the game (during the big win)". While the return-in-progress screen for intermediate use is displayed and the audio output device 9 is silent, the sub information display device 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, Sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 67 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special performance pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. Then, a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. A screen will appear.

Also, when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance is continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In FIGS. 65 to 68, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and the sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to display control is reduced when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It becomes possible to

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the sub-variation display device (first sub-variation display device 81, second sub-variation display device 82) restarts the power supply that was stopped during the variation effect. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. It is designed to be a display mode showing the number of reservations from when (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variation display and when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as in the case, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various roles is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control related to the return operation of various character objects, and to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various character objects.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. From the timing after (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed), the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the production symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during recovery middle) to perform the initial actions of various roles. Therefore, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power supply restoration without accompanying, when the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the fluctuation display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83 , and the second sub-holding display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holdings, and then the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the board role can be performed after the player grasps the number of pending games (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, , When the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-suspension display device (sub-first suspension display device 83, sub-second suspension display device 84 ) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the frame role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance design 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the performance design 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of various roles It is designed to work. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, when power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed to restore various characters. Action, initial action, and initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, when a special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is received from the main control board 110, a winning sound is generated. It is designed to output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 receives a variable start command from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect corresponding to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When a variable start command is received from the main control board 110 when the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is performed without executing the return action or the initial action of various characters. is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect using various accessories without being hindered by a return motion or an initial motion during execution of a variable effect.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the performance control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) has been completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the effect control board 130 is already in the process of changing effect after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board 110 If a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting only the power supply to , the return operation of various roles and the initial operation ( including initial light emission). Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the effect control board 130 responds to the command, such as during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which it is possible to execute the effect shown above, when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110 , the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the reset operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are not executed, but the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. You can also just output the .

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the performance control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) has been completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game, the main control board When the power supply to 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed. ing. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the effect control board 130 is already in the process of changing effect after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the performance control board 130 responds to the command, such as during the jackpot performance after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 stops while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 53 to 68, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 69 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a second standby screen in which the special production pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button are displayed. The LED is lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen is displayed in a state in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display device 86) also maintains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special production pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and an initialization consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" from the voice output device 9. A notification sound is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops and then resumes during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. The example shown in FIG. 65 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), or a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). is basically the same as

(Modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 70 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A description will be given of a case where the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply is still continuing.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special production pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. The standby screen in which the shown effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "753" at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even when the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 66 to 68 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a variable production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

In FIGS. 69 and 70, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the modifications shown in FIGS. 69 to 70, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the production pattern 70a is displayed differs from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modifications shown in FIGS. 69 to 70, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed while the initial screen is being displayed. , and the production button LED is turned off. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial action of various characters from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, the various characters start at the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or between the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen. may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received. You may make it switch to a screen. In this case, the initial action of each character may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at the timing before the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. At the switching timing, the initial actions of various roles may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial actions of various characters may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or at the timing from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. At the timing of switching to , the initial actions of various roles may be started.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special effect symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". .

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify that the return abnormality has occurred. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation process ends without executing the operation.

At the timing of T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball enters the first start port 45 When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning is received, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation The first suspension icon is displayed in the icon display area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display device 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED The LED and effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

Even if the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are completed without executing the initial movement.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a restoration abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED inform the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. In order to do so, the red blinking (abnormality notification mode) is performed, and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 .

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 71, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member with the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed for any movable member that does not have one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation effect, jackpot game), thereby reducing the enjoyment of the game. can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 71, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flashes in red to notify recovery failure. Therefore, compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable member has an abnormality.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 71, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member The effect button 17 that has no danger of colliding with the member 74 is designed to perform an initial action. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and the abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 71, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the production button LED provided in the production button 17 returns. Initial light emission is performed instead of red flashing for announcing an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
FIGS. 72 and 73 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), when the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red character icon to start the icon change effect, and accordingly, the winning entrance lamp NR is extinguished to flash red. By changing to the state where the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(c), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the center variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when the game progresses to SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 72(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 72(f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 73(g), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "Loading", but the winning entrance lamp NR is turned off. maintained.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (including the execution period of the promotion effect for whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect pattern is promoted to the jackpot effect pattern of higher value for the player). However, here too, the win-win lamp NR remains turned off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a loss ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 73 (i), a temporary stop display ( A stop screen (second standby screen) in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special effect pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) without performing shaking fluctuation) are displayed. Then, the variable performance ends without restarting the ramp change performance.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the rectangular By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 73(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. A first pending icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a big hit ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. ``777'' jackpot effect pattern 70a that suggests the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing swing fluctuation/swing display) (formed the reach state before power off) A combination of production patterns different from the reach combination by the production patterns of 3 ↓ 3”), and a stop screen with the special production pattern TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and a lamp change production is performed with the winning entrance lamp NR. The variable production ends without restarting.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which normal variation is performed, variable performance in which shortened variation is performed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is performed, SP reach performance is executed), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation/swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and " 753", or a combination of the same production pattern as the ready-to-win combination by the production pattern that formed the ready-to-win state before the power was cut off, or a combination of different production patterns, which is a stop display (static display). will be

Also, with regard to the special effect pattern TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) Regardless of whether or not, the special effect symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) with numbers that have the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 73(l), information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game) is displayed on the image display device. An opening effect is started, and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed after the production design 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation) is resumed. After the game control state is restored, the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol stop designation command (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state is shifted to the customer waiting state after that, the customer waiting state designation command) is received, the production design 70a is stop-displayed (stationary display) without the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation/swing display) of the production design 70a. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply that was stopped during execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When it is done, the combination of the production design which is the initial design at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) instead of the normal losing production design. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining the stop display (static display) effect pattern by lottery. It is possible to grasp that the variable performance that has been performed has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the big hit variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When there is, the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the control state of the game is the restoration of the power supply, and that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the jackpot variation performance.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 72 to 73, after the game control state is restored, when the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still display), the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (stationary display) a combination of big hit production patterns different from the reach combination by the production pattern that was used. Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of the jackpot performance symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 73, when the execution period of the promotion production described above is included in the variable production executed at the time the power supply is stopped, the power supply is restarted and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no useless effect is performed until the effect pattern is stopped (stationary display), the player is immediately notified that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variable effect. It is possible to grasp the

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 73, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and when the jackpot fluctuation production is executed, it is stopped. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the power supply is restarted is the same as when the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being conscious of whether the losing variation effect is being executed or the big win variation effect is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted. can be reduced.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 73, the special production pattern TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, the stop display (stationary display) is made with the same combination of numbers as the production pattern 70a. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the stopped power supply is resumed while the pending icon is being displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the suspended icon display area, so that the suspended icon display space (display area) can display the effect image such as the background image. It is now reserved and has a pending icon. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable performance is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the variation production corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) When the stopped power supply is resumed during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit big without restarting the lamp change effect. It is designed to be in a notification mode (lights out or white lighted) that does not suggest the degree of winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation effect, the stop screen in which the big win effect pattern 70a and the special effect pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

In addition, after the end of the execution period of the big hit variation performance, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special performance pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen is not displayed and the jackpot performance patterns are displayed. An opening performance of a jackpot game in which 70a is not displayed may be started. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, a jackpot special effect pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, may be displayed. A production pattern TZ may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the losing variation performance is over, the performance symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special performance symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big hit variation performance is over, The opening effect of the big win game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the big win effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific effect of inciting whether or not the big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win state effect symbol 70a in the variable effect (makes people expect that the big win game is executed), the specific effect After the power supply stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big win. You may make it stop-display (still display) the big hit production|presentation pattern 70a.

Further, when the combination of the jackpot performance symbols is stopped (still displayed) after the game control state is recovered, one of the combinations of the plurality of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is “333” and “777”, and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is “222” and “ 444", "666" and "888", and the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555" and "999".

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" constituting a part of the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special effect pattern TZ is not stopped and displayed (still displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the effect pattern 70a, but with a combination different from the effect pattern 70a. You may make it stop-display (still display) by a number.

Further, when the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, in the normal game state and the customer waiting state, the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed), while the power is supplied. When the specific game state (low probability short working hours game state, high probability short working hours game state) and customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, stop display (stationary display) of the production pattern 70a without , the special effect symbol TZ may be stopped and displayed (still displayed).

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable performance that is the preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the first pending icon ( The final display mode of the icon (=red character icon) is changed to a blue character icon to start the pending icon change effect, and along with this, the winning entrance lamp NR changes from a state in which it is extinguished to a state in which it blinks in blue. , the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 74(d), after the production pattern 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss production pattern 70a of "259" and the special production pattern TZ are stopped and displayed. be.

After that, when the variable effect as the preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. 74(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 74(g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain the turned-off state without resuming the change performance.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the win-win lamp NR remains turned off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance fluctuation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG. A stop screen is displayed in a state where the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special effect pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the lamp change effect is not restarted. Prevariation ends.

At this time, the CD icon, which is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped, is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, by displaying the rectangular area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect for executing the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, as shown in FIG. 75(k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first 1 pending icon (CD icon) is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery for the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue character icon according to the result, and the icon is displayed. A change production is started. On the other hand, since the lottery relating to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the lamp change effect is not restarted while the prize winning entrance lamp NR is kept turned off.

In addition, when a lottery relating to the alternative notice effect performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini-character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini-character MCB moves out of the frame to substitute. A preview effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(l), the words uttered by ally A are displayed in the words window displayed on the image display device, and a voice corresponding to the words from the voice output device 9 "Your chance is here!" is displayed, the dialog announcement effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 75(m), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 75(n), SP reach effect is started, effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, first pending icon display area 70B, and second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 75(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big hit), as shown in FIG. A jackpot performance pattern 70a of ``333'' suggesting the type of one jackpot game) and a special performance pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance ends.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

In addition, when the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation production (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) production pattern 70a is not displayed. , the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) is continued.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 74 to 75, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the continuous notice production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration It is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect without restarting the continuous notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the reserved icon displayed as a special icon (including the case where it has not changed until the final display mode and the case where it has changed until the final display mode) When the power supply stopped during icon display is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 74 to 75, when the power supply stopped during execution of the icon change production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration In the variable effect corresponding to , the pending icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, during the execution of the variable production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, even if the icon change production is executed again, The continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was cut off is no longer executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation production corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change effect is not restarted. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (extinguished or lit in white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning a big win. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. and

First, FIG. 76(a) will be described.
FIG. 76(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). there is

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a is disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. , and the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG containing the words "connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 issues an alarm and a message "connection error". A connection error notification sound is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start opening detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG.76(b) is demonstrated.
FIG. 76(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). there is

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is inserted halfway and the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are disconnected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the characters "Magnetic Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "Radio Wave Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "Connection Error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error annunciation image EG including the words "detected" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error annunciation sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "Magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been cancelled, but various error reports continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error Notification is not executed.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 76, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection switch, magnetic detection switch, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) connected to the main control board 110 When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error is notified. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-insertion, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 76, the specific detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state returns to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 76, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

It should be noted that even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (the starting port detection switch, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , During the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (at the start of display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen), various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues. The connection error notification may be canceled when the unconnected state changes to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error with a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are If they occur at the same time, they are not output. However, it is also possible to output notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred in order.

In the magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. may not be output.

Also when the connection state of various detection means changes during the variable performance, various error notifications are executed in the same manner as when the connection state of the various detection means changes during the customer waiting state. When the execution of various error notifications is started, the production sounds related to the variable production (scrolling sound of the production pattern 70a, various notice sounds, etc.) are muted (output at volume "0"). It should be noted that the production sound related to the variable production may be stopped from being output instead of being muted.
In addition, only when the error has a high priority (importance) (for example, a magnetic error), when the execution of the error notification is started, the effect sound related to the variable effect (scroll sound of the effect pattern 70a, various notice sounds, etc.) may be muted or stopped outputting.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 .
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as those of the role product initial process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes are described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. , the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the power was turned on last time) has passed, the process proceeds to step R103, and the predetermined period of time has not passed. In that case, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 77, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. Therefore, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or whether the control state of the game is restored. can be reduced.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 77, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery command) is executed. When a designated command) is received, the return action of various characters and the initial action are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 was not started normally, and the power-on command was transmitted later than usual (abnormality occurred in the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110). can be grasped.

Note that when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the return operation of various characters, and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), The voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights up in order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), The voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white. , the light emission mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), The voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. finish.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), The voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as a power-on time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change to light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). .

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E is "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, producing a production The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). .

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). .

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emission mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). .

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The displayed pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and voice output The device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, The light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving the special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) as a power ON command, the image display device displays the screen during recovery. A state is maintained in which the reserved number is not displayed in the 1 special figure reserved number display area 70E or the 2nd special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 and the sub-normal figure suspension indicator 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ. A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a (static display) state is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110 and power supply is started. Then, the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 is in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the initial motion of the effect button 17 is started. At timing T5, when the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at T5 the initial action of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the time T6, the second movable When the initial action of the member 74 is finished, the initial action process is finished, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), The voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

Note that the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 87, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), The audio output device 9 remains silent.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, although the audio output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when a power restoration designation command is received, an information sound (alert, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) is emitted for a predetermined period. You may make it output over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 87 and 88, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, the case where power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 87, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number, and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the display mode of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED changes and turns off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the performance design 70a of "753" which is the initial design at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ, the movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 90 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the returning operation of various characters and the initial operation are completed, and the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. 70a and a second standby screen in which the special effect symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect The button LED is illuminated while the customer is waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also display contents maintain.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 issues an alarm and " RAM is cleared." is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 91 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special production pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. The standby screen in which the shown effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the first movable member 73, and the effect button 17. return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). A second standby screen is displayed.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is performed. After the end, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 92 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 is silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub-normal figure suspension display 86) maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special effect symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs a stop sound. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the performance symbol 70a such as "777", which is the jackpot performance symbol, and the special performance symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the sub-first variation display is displayed. At 81 , the jackpot display mode is displayed to indicate that the jackpot has been won, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At the timing of T11, when receiving a variation start command (effect design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E When it becomes "0", a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but may be extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red blinking) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the production pattern 70a are not performed. , the variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 93 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the special jackpot effect pattern TZ (“777”) is displayed. ) is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a during-returning screen for during-jackpot including characters of "Please restart the game (during-jackpot)" is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal A view hold indicator 86) maintains its display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 92 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special performance pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. Then, a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. A screen will appear.

Also, when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance is continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red blinking) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In FIGS. 90 to 93, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of the power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and the sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to display control is reduced when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It becomes possible to

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82) resumes the power supply that was stopped during the variation presentation. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) displays the returning screen on the image display device. It is designed to be a display mode showing the number of reservations from when (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variation display and when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various roles is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control related to the return operation of various character objects, and to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various character objects.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (the first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the initial actions of various roles are performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power restoration without accompanying, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device ), the initial operation is performed. Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, with respect to the frame role (effect button 17), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, , The initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device) It's like Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the performance is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, Then, the display of the initial screen is continued while executing the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, even if the display of the initial screen is continued due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), When the special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is received from the main control board 110 when the performance control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the performance according to the command, winning It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the effect When receiving a variation start command from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the performance control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the effect control board 130, such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters. You can just do it.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the performance control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

In addition, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as the returning operation of various roles and the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed and the jackpot effect. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot effect after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the effect Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 stops while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 78 to 93, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the effect Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect. The state of waiting for a command (for example, during display of the initial screen) may also be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but may be composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decoration part). For example, it is preferable to use a different character for each number, such as "1" and character A, "2" and character B, and so on. Also, in the normal game state, the production pattern 70a is displayed with numbers + characters, and in the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), the production pattern 70a is only numbers or numbers + characters smaller than the normal game state. can be displayed with

Also, three types of production modes A to C may be provided in the normal game state, and at least one of the number design and character design of the production pattern 70a may be different for each production mode. Also, two types of production modes D to E may be provided in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and at least one of the design of the numbers and the design of the characters of the production pattern 70a may be different for each production mode. Furthermore, two types of production modes F to G may be provided in the low-probability short-time gaming state, and at least one of the number design and character design of the production pattern 70a may be changed for each production mode.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes A to C in the normal game state, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the production mode A is always set. At the same time, after the end of the display of the initial screen or the returning screen, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is displayed still without being oscillatingly displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the production mode D is always performed. In addition to being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode D is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes F to G in the low-probability short-time game state, and then the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the production mode F is always performed. In addition to being set, after the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery is completed, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode F is not oscillatingly displayed but is still displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

In addition, when the production pattern 70a is reduced in the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production in the normal game state, the production pattern 70a is changed to numbers only, and the production pattern 70a is temporarily displayed after the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production is completed. When the stop display (swing display) is performed, the production pattern 70a may be returned to the number+character.

In this case, the power supply is stopped during SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the effect pattern 70a is changed to only numbers, and then the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When this is done, after the end of the display of the screen during recovery, the production pattern 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but is still displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

Furthermore, the power supply is stopped during the SP reach or SPSP reach in the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), that is, when the production pattern 70a is only a number, and then the power supply When the game is resumed and the control state of the game is recovered, the production pattern 70a with only numbers is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. FIG. FIG. 94 is a timing chart 1 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 95(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

The effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal game state includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a tactile image SG which is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration part made up of a pattern effect image ZE to be decorated and an identification part made up of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). Also, the production pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of the identification portion consisting of the number portion (identification character).

Also, in the normal game state, the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes A to C are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion). Also, in the specific game state, the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion).

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the changing BGM is being output is "2" in the non-animation for one frame. , the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. displayed as Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

The variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, the variable display is represented by a double circle. It shall be. Also, the LED of the first sub-hold display 83 is represented by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of ten frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 95(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 95(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 95(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 95(d)). ).

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 95(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 95(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. The period of display is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained (see FIG. 95(f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 95(g)).

Then, while the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 95). (g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image is continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 95(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the icon TI continues rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 95(i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is being scrolled and the icon TI is being rotated, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ are displayed. extended (see FIG. 95(i)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the customer waiting state (game waiting state) transition to When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and a special production is performed. The symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 95(j)).

At the timing of T7, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally received by the production control unit 130m. The same processing as when it is impossible will be performed.

Here, although the specific example 1 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variation game state), basically The flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

In addition, when the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communicating between the substrate 110 and the performance control substrate 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. FIG. 96 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 97(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. This is production example 1.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of 10 frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 97(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 97(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 97(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 97(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 97(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 97(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. Display period is extended. Also, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects continue (see FIG. 97(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 97(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 97(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icon HI displayed third in the reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past fluctuation The effect pattern 70a) which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the effect is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 97(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts to scroll after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 97(h)).

When the redundant reserved icons are erased and the required reserved icons are shifted and displayed, the redundant reserved icons may be left as they are and the required reserved icons may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 97(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special design in which the first special figure reservation number becomes "0" In (Target of expectation level suggestion by prefetch zone production), normal zone production (display of prefetch zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is executed along with the notice scenario, and the production pattern 70a is the real one. The look-ahead zone effect ends at the point of stop.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" was described, but the first special figure pending number is " 4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 2 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 98. FIG. FIG. 96 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 98(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. This is production example 2.

Note that FIG. 97 and FIG. 98 are different in that the look-ahead effect presentation is executed instead of the look-ahead zone presentation as the look-ahead preview presentation and the icon change presentation is performed, so the explanation of the common parts is omitted here. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 98 ( d) see).

Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special production pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 98(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 98(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 98(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. Display period is extended. Also, the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 98(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 98(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 98(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus pending icon HI displayed second in the pending icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is erased by one frame of non-animation. displayed second. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 98(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 98(h)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed at high speed. to scroll. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 98(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of first special symbol reservations becomes "0" A look-ahead effect presentation (display of an effect image EF, output of an effect sound) and an icon change presentation (the icon change presentation) are also executed in the presentation (target of expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead preview presentation). Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" was described, but the first special figure pending number is " 4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 3 in the case where the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first pending information), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number, the surplus pending icon (for example, the third A necessary number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are shift-displayed without shift-displaying the pending icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of the reserved icon (first reserved information) two more than the predetermined number (for example, one) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number during the display of, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number of pending icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the specific number (for example, one) two more than the predetermined number ( For example, while displaying the number of reservations of 3), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures is a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without doing anything. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. FIG. 99 is a timing chart 3 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 100(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. This is production example 1.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of 10 frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 100(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 100(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 100(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 100(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 100(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 100(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. Display period is extended. Also, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 100(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 100(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 100(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 100(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 100(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) is changed from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icons HI displayed at the second and third positions in the reserved icon display area 70B are erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a ( The production pattern 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production, is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 100(h)).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts to scroll after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 100(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 100(i)).

After that, when the production control section 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control section 110m, the look-ahead zone production ends when the production pattern 70a actually stops.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 4" to "1", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 4 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 101. FIG. FIG. 99 is a timing chart 3 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 101(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. This is production example 2.

Note that FIG. 100 and FIG. 101 are different in that a look-ahead effect presentation is executed instead of a look-ahead zone presentation as the look-ahead preview presentation and an icon change presentation is performed, so description of common parts is omitted here. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special production pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 101(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 101(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 101(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. Display period is extended. Also, the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 101(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 101(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 101(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 101(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. The display period is extended (see FIG. 101(g)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) is changed from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The first and second surplus pending icon HIs displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are deleted by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is deleted for one frame. Appears first in non-animation. Further, all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance patterns 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed behind and below the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 101(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, the icon change performance is executed simultaneously with the completion of the shift display of the icon, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is finished, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 101(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 4" to "1", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 5 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of pending icons (first pending information), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the special figure reservation number is a predetermined number, the predetermined number without displaying the reservation icon of the number one less than the specific number is now displayed with a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of the pending icon (first pending information) three more than the predetermined number (eg, one) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number during the display of, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specified number is displayed without displaying the specified number. A number of pending icons less by two is displayed, followed by a predetermined number of pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the specific number (for example, one) three more than the predetermined number ( For example, 4) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures is a predetermined number, the number of reservations less than the specific number by 1 and 2 A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed without displaying the number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. FIG. 102 is a timing chart 4 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 103(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation of 10 frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 103(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 103(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 103(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special effect symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 103(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 103(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 103(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. Display period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 103). (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 103(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 103(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 103(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 103(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 103(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 103(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "0 , and a process of setting a waiting timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icons HI displayed in the first to third positions in the reserved icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased by one frame of non-animation, and icon change effect and The look-ahead zone production ends. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display). , The special effect symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights off) (see FIG. 103(h)).

At the timing of T7 to T13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m explained the case where the customer waiting state designation command was received in the state of "3", but the first special Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the figure pending number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 6 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the production patterns 70a (the production patterns 70a which were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the production patterns 70a shifted from the stopped position are displayed (finally stopped) at the stop position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable effect has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Concrete example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 7 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. FIG. 104 is a timing chart 5 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 105(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

102 and 104 differ only in that the command received at the timing of T14 is the customer waiting designation command or the opening designation command. Only part will be explained.

At the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the jackpot A process for starting the opening effect of the game is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed in the effect pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon HI and the corresponding icon are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. In addition, the special effect symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (turning off), and an opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 105). (h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game is finished (time saving game state, variable probability game state), when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m , The first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command in non-animation for one frame.

At the timing of T7 to T13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the first special figure pending number that the effect control unit 130m memorizes (knows) explained the case where the opening designation command is received in a state of "3", but the first special figure pending Even when the opening specifying command is received with the number being "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 7 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) including the performance symbols 70a deviated from the existing stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and the jackpot game is performed. An opening effect image is displayed. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. FIG. 106 is a timing chart 6 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 107(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 107(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see FIG. 107 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 107(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. Display period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 107). (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable effect without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first A second pending icon HI (CD icon) in the pending icon display area 70B is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame (displayed in a normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 107(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 107). (e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 107 ( f) see).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production (SP ready-to-win production ends), the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in the ready-to-win losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 107(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 107(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 107(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. , a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 107 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at winning, command at stop) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command sent from The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of T5, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 0" to "0", if the first special figure reservation number is from "2" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "3" to "3", that is, the main control If the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 110m and the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 8 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 106 to 107, during the display of a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icon (first pending information) in the pending icon display area, the special figure pending number is specified When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is the number, after displaying the pending icons one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), the pending icons are shift-displayed. , a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 106 to 107, while displaying the number of reservations of a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the figure holding number is a predetermined number, the holding number of the predetermined number is not displayed. It is designed to display numbers. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 106 to 107, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but the special figure pending number is "0" while the icon is displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display of The pending icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 106 to 107, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the special figure reservation number When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display to be "0", the number of reservations of "0" is displayed without displaying the number of reservations one more than "0" (for example, one) is displayed (maintained). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. FIG. 108 is a timing chart 7 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 109(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 109(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see FIG. 109 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see FIG. 109 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see FIG. 109 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 109(c)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special effect pattern TZ is changed, and the first lamp pattern LZ is changed. Display period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 109). (d)).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m remembers (knows) the first special figure reservation number becomes "3" from "1" and processing for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first Suspended icon HI (CD icon) is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the second to fourth positions in the suspended icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 109(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 109). (e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 109 ( f) see).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T6, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stop, command at the time of start) was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, but based on the reception of this command Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the command (the winning command, the stopping command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m , start time command) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m.

Here, at the timing of T7, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "3" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 1" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "0" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "0" to "1", that is, the main control If the number of suspensions stored (grasped) by the unit 110m is greater than the number of suspensions stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as described above. .

Also, here, although the specific example 9 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 108 to 109, during the display of a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icon (first pending information) in the pending icon display area, the special figure pending number is specified When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the number, after displaying the pending icon that is one larger than the specific number (for example, three) , a specific number of pending icons are displayed by shift-displaying those pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 108 to 109, while displaying the number of reservations of a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the figure holding number is a specific number (for example, 2) that is larger than the predetermined number, the holding number that is 1 more than the specific number (for example, 3) It is designed to display a certain number of pending counts without displaying . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 108 to 109, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but during the display of the icon, the special figure pending number is a predetermined number ( For example, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is 1), after displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2), those pending icons are shifted By displaying, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 108 to 109, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the special number of reservations is When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a predetermined number (for example, one), the predetermined number is displayed without displaying the number of holds that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two) It is designed to display the number of pending. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Summary of specific examples shown in FIGS. 94 to 109)
As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the production design 70a, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped. The period, the fluctuation period of the special effect pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ, and the output period of the BGM during fluctuation are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon are continued. ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring performance with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). It's like Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, in the case of continuing (executing) the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, Even if there is, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not changed. As a result, the advance of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not abnormal, and the game can be more interesting by avoiding inconveniences that cause dissatisfaction of the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined stop After all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the variable display is started. It is designed to Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display is started with the performance pattern 70a deviated from the stop position, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the special production design TZ and the lamp The symbol LZ is designed to continue the variable display without being stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special effect symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ. Further, even if the production pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the special production pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ can let the player know that the variable production is being performed, thereby improving the game. It is possible to improve interest.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the start time command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the icon is displayed at the normal time. It is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the change performance to be newly executed to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m When normally receives the start time command, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 94 to 109, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m When normally receives the command at the time of start, in the newly executed variable effect, it is possible to execute the effect of contents according to the scenario of the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, even when a command abnormality in which the performance control part 130m cannot receive the command normally occurs, the advance of the pre-reading notice performance does not become abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied is avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. FIG. 110 is a timing chart 8 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 111(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending.

At this time, since the command at the time of winning that the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, the first special that is displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The figure pending number remains "1", and the second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" in the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed (Fig. 111 (a) reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first In the second of the reserved icon display areas 70B corresponding to the first special figure reserved number "2" which could not receive the command at the time of winning, the reserved icon HI is not displayed and the first special figure reserved number "3" ” is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of 10 frames (see FIG. 111(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 111(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 111(d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable production when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "2" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" that could not receive the command at the time of winning in the pending icon display area 70B is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (normal size from the beginning ), and the three displayed pending icons HI are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 111(e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 111(f)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 111(g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 111(h)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 111(i)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. , a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 111 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

At the timing of T2, the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. is not normally received by the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, it is the same as when the effect control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. will be processed.

Here, at the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", the first special figure reservation number is "3" When the winning command is received Although the case was explained, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m was "1", the first special figure reservation number was "4" When the winning command was received In the case, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "0", the first special figure reservation number is "2", "3", or "4" Winning Even when the hour command is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 10 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. is not displayed, the number of special figures pending is a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number. Instead of displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to the number (eg, second), the pending icon is displayed in an area (eg, third) corresponding to a specific number of the pending icon display areas. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 to 111, the number (eg, 1 ) while displaying the number of reservations, the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number. It is designed to display a certain number of pending counts without displaying them. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. is not displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that has a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number of special figure reservations, a predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas The area corresponding to the specific number of the reserved icon display areas (e.g., the second) without displaying the reserved icon in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to one less than the specific number (e.g., the second) For example, the 4th) is designed to display a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 to 111, the number (eg, 1 ) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that is a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number to the specific number It is designed to display a specific number of holds without displaying one less number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas, and While displaying the reserved icon in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) by one more, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, A specific number of reserved icons are additionally displayed in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number of reserved icon display areas, and then a predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed by shifting the reserved icons. It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and a number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 3) without displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to the number of special figures pending while displaying the pending icon in the area (e.g. 4th) corresponding to a specific number (e.g. 4) more than the predetermined number When the effect control unit 130m receives a start time command that is one less than the specific number, an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, the second) of the reserved icon display areas and a number that is one more than the predetermined number After displaying a specific number of reserved icons by additionally displaying a reserved icon in the area corresponding to (for example, 3), the reserved icons are shifted to display a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number. It is designed to display. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 to 111, the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as a pending icon. Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Modification 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
96 and 112, a modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 96 and 97 (modification 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 112(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Since FIG. 97 and FIG. 112 are the same up to timings T0 to T9, explanations of common parts will be omitted here, and only different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original deviation of 1 However, since an abnormality that is a divergence of 2 or more has occurred, the look-ahead zone effect ends.

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output (see FIG. 112(h)).

In addition, the surplus reserved icon HI displayed second in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and the third reserved icon HI is displayed for one frame. is displayed second in the non-animation of All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (Fig. 112). (h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 112(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 112(i)).

(Modified example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
96 and 113, a modification of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 96 and 98 (modification 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 113(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Since FIG. 98 and FIG. 113 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original deviation of 1 However, since an abnormality that is a divergence of 2 or more occurs, the icon change effect and the look-ahead effect effect end.

Specifically, the surplus reserved icon HI (blue character icon) displayed third in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 113(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special effect symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 113(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 113(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed for the variable display of the special symbols in which the first special figure reservation number becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading preview effect), the pre-reading effect effect and the icon change effect are not executed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 112 to 113, the first special figure pending number and the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m was notified from the main control unit 110m If there is an inconsistency due to command abnormality (original deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but deviation of 2 or more in the decreasing direction) occurs, a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect , icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) are terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
106 and 114, a modification of specific example 8 described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 107 (modification 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 114(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 107 and 114 are the same up to the timings T0 to T4, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable effect without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the production control unit 130m (original 1 in the decreasing direction) The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are ended because there is a discrepancy (abnormality of the same number).

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Also, the first blue character icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to the CD icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second pending icon HI (CD icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation. (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 114(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 114). (e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 114 ( f) see).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a reach-losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 114(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 114(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the expansion/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 114(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 114 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 114, command between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that is notified from the main control unit 110m If an inconsistency caused by an abnormality occurs (abnormality where the deviation is 1 but the number is the same), the pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change effect, pre-reading effect effect) is terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modification 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
108 and 115, a modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 108 and 109 (modification 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 115(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 109 and 115 are the same up to the timings T0 to T6, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m remembers (knows) the first special figure reservation number becomes "3" from "1" and processing for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original in the decreasing direction The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated because there is a deviation of 1 from the value and an abnormality of 1 or more in the increasing direction.

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Also, the first blue character icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to the CD icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth pending icons HI (CD icons) are non-animated for one frame. is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 115(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special effect pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 115). (e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 115 ( f) see).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 115, between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that are notified from the main control unit 110m command In the event of an inconsistency caused by an abnormality (normally, a deviation of 1 in the direction of decrease, but a deviation of 1 or more in the direction of increase), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change production, look-ahead effect production) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
110 and 116, a modification (modification 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) of the concrete example 10 described in FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. 116(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG.

111 and 116 have the same timing from T6 to T11, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, production pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special effect pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see Fig. 116 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first A second hold icon HI in the hold icon display area 70B is displayed as a non-animation of 1 frame, and a third hold icon HI is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (gradually larger from a very small size). is displayed) (see FIG. 116(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production design 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE that constitute the production design 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 116(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special production pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 116(d)).

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 116, the pending icon (first pending information) is displayed in an area (eg, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (eg, two) of the pending icon display areas. When not, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the number of reserved icons corresponds to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas. A pending icon is additionally displayed in a region corresponding to a specific number (eg, the second) and a region corresponding to a specific number (eg, the third). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 116, the number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E When the production control unit 130m receives a prize winning command in which the number of reserved special figures is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number while the number of reservations is being displayed, the number of reservations of the predetermined number is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts instead of Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 116, the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas. When, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning, which is a specific number (for example, four) of which the special figure pending number is more than a predetermined number, an area corresponding to a predetermined number of the pending icon display areas ( For example, the reserved icon is additionally displayed in areas corresponding to a specific number (for example, the 4th) from the 2nd). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 116, the number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E While the number of reservations is displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, 4) more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number is less than the specific number by one. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts without displaying the number of pending counts. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 116, for the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command, the icon change effect is displayed during display as the pending icon. is not executed, but an icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As described above, in the case where the effect control unit 130m is not able to normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (second When the production control unit 130m receives the 1 special figure pending number specification command, production pattern specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command), the production design 70a shifted from the stop position is displayed at the stop position (predetermined position) (momentary is derived and displayed), and then the variable display is started.
That is, the mode of starting the variable display, after the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (First special figure pending number specification command, production design specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) It is in the same mode as when the production control unit 130m receives.

In other words, when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped display (when the production control unit 130m has not normally received the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m), the main control When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start (first special figure pending number designation command, production design specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the unit 110m, the production design 70a stops and displays (When the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m), the start command (first It can be said that the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started in the same manner when the production control unit 130m receives the special figure pending number designation command, the production pattern designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command.
In addition, when the production design 70a is temporarily stopped display (when the production control unit 130m has not normally received the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m), the main control unit When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start (first special figure pending number designation command, production design specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from 110m, the temporary stop display of the production design 70a is terminated. It can also be said that the variable display is performed after (after the production pattern 70a is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (predetermined position)).

In this embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, all the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (shake motion), but the left and right production patterns 70a are stopped and the central production Only the pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped (shaking motion). At this time, all the three production patterns 70a may perform a fluctuation action (production action), or the left and right production patterns 70a do not fluctuate (production action), and only the central production pattern 70a fluctuates (production action). ).

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SG and the design effect image ZE, which constitute the decorative portion, fluctuate during the temporary stop of the performance design 70a. Only one of the above may perform the fluctuation motion (effect motion).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the identification unit composed of the hexagonal base image and the number portion (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (production operation) when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. A texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation action (drawing action), or a fluctuation action (drawing action) may be performed by adding a light emission effect to the identification section.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the production pattern 70a is shifted from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). large), it should be normal size and displayed at the stop position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a. You may make it fluctuate|move like this. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. The performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. You may make it fluctuate motion (drawing motion).

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the frame lighting device At least one of the plurality of light emitting units that constitute 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the board illumination device 76 is set to the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission with less change and movement than during fluctuation) mode, extinguished). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 changes (switches) to a lighting mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a in the losing mode is actually stopped, the special production pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the number is the same as that of the production pattern 70a. The final stop may be made in such a failing mode. Also, when the production pattern 70a of the big win mode is actually stopped, the special production pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined big win mode ("333"), but in the big win mode with the same number as the production pattern 70a. A final stop may be made.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a (special figure pending number specification command, production design specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) production control unit When 130m receives, the variable display of the special effect pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ is continued, but like the effect pattern 70a, the variable display is started after instantaneously deriving display. good too. In this case, as for the special effect symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special effect symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start command or the customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. It may be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI upon receipt of the command, the 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and the 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the command at the start is received during the display of the number of pending icons larger than the number of special figure pending, the surplus pending icon HI is erased by one frame worth of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI, 20 frames for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the hold icon based on the reception of the stop command. It may be erased by animation for 5 frames.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, so that the number of special figures reserved and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number that was grasped), one more than the predetermined number After displaying a large number of pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. can be

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, so that the number of special figures reserved and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is a mismatch (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number that was grasped), reception of this command at the start However, the icon may not be displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of the command at the start.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is the CD icon regardless of the type of effect mode. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of effect mode or game state, the action mode (mode of effect action) during the variable effect is changed according to the form of the normal icon. good too. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of the effect mode or the game state, the mode of action (mode of the effect action) during the variable effect can be changed according to the form of the special icon. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect. A specific icon suggesting that a ready-to-win effect (for example, an SP ready-to-win effect or an SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation icon is displayed when both the prefetching designation command of the special figure reservation number designation command as the winning command is normally received, but the special figure reservation number designation command is received If you do not receive the prefetch designation command normally, you will display a pending icon, while if you do not receive the special figure hold number designation command normally and you will receive the prefetch designation command normally, display the pending icon You may choose not to do so, or vice versa. In addition, when receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the look-ahead designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the production mode is not accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to regulate the change of the production mode based on the operation of .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, In response to the operation of the effect button 17 during display of the button icon for which is valid, an operation change effect of changing the button icon to any of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. . In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-described speech announcement effect and final effect, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect. The rate of change should be higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation unit for performing operation effects (dialogue announcement effect, decision effect) was only the effect button 17, but an operation unit such as a effect lever is provided separately from the effect button 17, for example During the effective period generated during the SP ready-to-play performance, an operation promoting performance for prompting the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever is executed, and the operation performance (decision performance, etc.) is executed according to the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever. may In this case, the decision effect in the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) is more An operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed at a low rate (hardly executed).

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, an operation announcement effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is not executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 that has become effective. In the first half period of the ready-to-win effect (for example, during normal reach) and the second half period (for example, during SP ready-to-win effect), the operation announcement effect may be executed respectively. In this case, the operation announcement effect executed in the second half period of the ready-to-win effect is more likely than the operation announcement effect executed in the first half period of the ready-to-win effect. ) should be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the notice in the big win notice effect and the motion of the movable member are not linked, but the degree of expectation of the notice in the big win notice effect and the motion of the movable member may be linked. In this case, during the execution of the variable performance, the movable member operates more when the announcement performance with high jackpot expectation is executed than when the announcement performance with low jackpot expectation is executed. It is preferable to make the ratio high (easy to operate).

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 126. FIG. Here, the description of the same parts as in the first embodiment is omitted, and the different parts are described.

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit 130m)
The fluctuation production start processing of the production control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing a variable effect pattern determination process in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E620-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 130a determines that it has received a variation pattern designation command (step E620-1: Yes), it moves the process to step E620-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received (step E620-1: No), the current variation effect pattern determination process is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a stores (moves) the received variation pattern designation command in the variation effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c in step E620-2.

Sub CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining a variable effect pattern in step E620-3, and selects a variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 in step E620-4. Incidentally, the fluctuation effect pattern determination table will be described later using FIG.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table at step E620-5, determines the variable effect pattern based on the variable pattern designation command and the random number value for determining the variable effect pattern, and at step E620-6, The determined variable performance pattern is stored in the variable performance pattern storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E620-7, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the variable effect pattern command is transmitted to the display/sound control section 140 and the lamp/driving control section 150 in the output control process of step E900.

The sub CPU 130a, in step E620-8, sets the variable effect time corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern to the variable effect timer, and in step E620-9, the variable effect data (effect content, Presence/absence of resurrection effect, start time of resurrection effect, presence/absence of re-lottery effect, start time of re-lottery effect, etc.) are set, and the current variable effect start processing is terminated.

(Variation production pattern decision table)
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a variable effect pattern.

In the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118, the variable pattern designation command, the selection rate by the random number for determining the variable effect pattern acquired in step E620-3, and the variable display of the special symbol are performed. Types (kinds) of variable performance patterns are associated with each other, and variable performance contents (variable performance scenarios) corresponding to the variable performance patterns are described as a reference.

Here, the "normal variable effect" of the variable effect content means that, as described above, the plurality of effect patterns 70a fluctuate at high speed, and a predetermined order (for example, the left variable display area → right side variable display area → center variable display area).

Further, the "shortened variable performance" is, as described above, a performance in which a plurality of performance symbols 70a fluctuate randomly at high speed, and all of the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped substantially at the same time without reaching reach. In addition, the variation time is shorter than that of the normal variation performance.

In addition, as described above, the "normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and in the central area It is a ready-to-win effect executed in a state where the remaining one effect pattern 70a forms a variable ready-to-win state.

In addition, as described above, the "SP ready-to-win production" is executed after the normal ready-to-win production, and the production pattern 70a in which the ready-to-win state is formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the production effect is higher than the normal ready-to-win production ( It is a reach production where movies (movies, animations, etc.) flow.

In addition, as described above, "SPSP reach production" is a movie (video , animation, etc.).

Further, the "all-rotation ready-to-win effect" is, as described above, a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for informing a big win are complete. In this embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

Further, the "resurrection effect" is a combination indicating that the result of the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is a failure. The effect to be displayed, the movement of the movable effect member 73, etc.) is performed, the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area is changed again, and the effect that all the effect patterns 70a are stopped in combination indicating a big win is performed. Say. Also, the “resurrection inciting effect” refers to an effect inciting whether or not the resurrection effect will be executed.

In addition, the "re-lottery effect" is a effect (promoting effect) that arouses whether or not the type of the jackpot game will be promoted. It is a performance to incite whether or not the jackpot game of low value for the player is promoted to a jackpot game advantageous to the player (high value) by re-fluctuation, and if it is not promoted, the jackpot game of low value to the player. The combination of the performance patterns 70a (jackpot result mode) generating the is stop-displayed, and the combination of the performance patterns 70a (jackpot result mode) for generating the jackpot game with high value for the player is stop-displayed in the case of promotion.

It is to be noted that stop display of the performance symbol 70a indicating that it is lost without becoming a ready-to-win is referred to as "losing the loose eye", and stop-displaying of the effect symbol 70a that indicates that it is lost after becoming a ready-to-win. It is sometimes called "reach loss".

As a feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the ready-to-win production increases in the order of normal ready-to-win production<SP ready-to-win production<SPSP ready-to-win production<full-rotation ready-to-win production (jackpot confirmed). There is a point. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the variable performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Timing chart for each variable production)
FIG. 119 is a timing chart of each variable effect. Specifically, FIG. 119(a) is a timing chart for variable effect pattern 1, FIG. 119(b) is a timing chart for variable effect pattern 3, and FIG. 119(c) is a variable effect pattern 4. FIG. 119(d) is a timing chart of variation effect pattern 9. FIG.

First, the timing chart of the variable effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 119(a) will be described.

At the timing of T00, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started. Then, at timing T01 after the variable display is performed for t1 seconds, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing T02 after t2 seconds have passed since the temporary stop display, the performance symbols 70a are permanently displayed (for t3 seconds), The variable production ends.

Next, the timing chart of the variable effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 119(b) will be described.

At the timing of T10, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started. Then, normal reach is started at timing T11 after fluctuating display for t4 seconds, and all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing T12 after t5 seconds have elapsed from the start of normal reach, and t6 seconds after the temporary stop display. At the timing T13 after the elapse, the production pattern 70a is displayed in a final stop (t7 seconds), and the variable production ends.

Next, the timing chart of the variable effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 119(c) will be described.

At the timing of T20, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started. Then, normal reach is started at timing T21 after fluctuating display for t8 seconds, and progresses from normal reach to SP reach at timing T22 after t9 seconds have elapsed from the start of normal reach, and SP reach is started. After that, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing T23, and the performance symbols 70a are permanently stopped and displayed at timing T24 after t11 seconds have passed since the temporary stop display (t12 seconds), and the variable performance ends.

Next, the timing chart of the variable effect pattern 9 shown in FIG. 119(d) will be described.

At the timing of T30, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started. Then, normal reach is started at timing T31 after fluctuating display for t13 seconds, and progresses from normal reach to SP reach at timing T32 after t14 seconds from the start of normal reach, and SP reach is started. After that, all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing T33, and the resurrection effect is started at timing T34 after t16 seconds have passed since the temporary stop display.
Incidentally, when the resurrection effect is started, the center effect pattern 70a again starts the variable display. Then, at timing T35, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed again, and at timing T36 after t18 seconds have passed since the temporary stop display, the performance symbols 70a are permanently displayed (t19 seconds), and the variable performance ends. .

In addition, in the timing chart of each variable effect shown in FIG. 119, the execution time (t2, t6, t11, t18) of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production design 70a and the execution time of the main stop display of the production design 70a ( t3, t7, t12, t19), but the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production pattern 70a is t2 (temporary stop display of the variable production pattern 1) < t6 (Temporary stop display of variable effect pattern 3) < t11 (temporary stop display of variable effect pattern 4), t18 (temporary stop display of variable effect pattern 9), the execution time becomes longer in order, and the effect symbol 70a The execution time of the stop display is: t3 (main stop display of variable production pattern 1) = t7 (main stop display of fluctuation production pattern 3) = t12 (main stop display of fluctuation production pattern 4) = t19 (main stop display of fluctuation production pattern 9) This stop display).

Also, t11, t16, and t18 may have the same execution time, or may have different execution times. good.

In addition, although the timing chart of the variable performance pattern in which the shortened variable performance, the SPSP reach performance, the revival stimulus performance, and the re-lottery performance are executed is not explained, the performance pattern in the variable performance pattern in which the shortened variable performance is executed The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of 70a is shorter than the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the performance symbol 70a in the variable performance pattern in which the normal fluctuation performance is executed. , The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production pattern 70a in the variable production pattern in which the SP ready-to-win production is executed is the time before the main stop display of the production pattern 70a in the variable production pattern in which the SP reach production is executed. is the same as the execution time of the temporary stop display, and the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production pattern 70a in the variable production pattern in which the resurrection effect and the re-lottery production are executed is It is assumed that the time is the same as the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect pattern 70a in the variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed.

That is, the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect pattern 70a according to the type of the variable effect pattern in the present embodiment is: variable effect pattern 2 (shortened variable effect) <variable effect pattern 1 (normal variable effect)< Variable performance pattern 3 (normal ready-to-win performance) <variable performance patterns 4 to 13 (SP ready-to-reach performance, SPSP ready-to-reach performance, resurrection performance, resurrection stimulating performance, re-lottery performance) are lengthened in this order. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the execution time of the final stop display of the effect symbol 70a in the present embodiment is the same time regardless of the variable effect pattern. By doing so, even if the execution time of the temporary stop display of the main stop display of the production pattern 70a differs depending on the fluctuation production pattern, the production pattern 70a can be stopped and displayed at least for a certain time or more, so that the big hit determination is performed. It is possible to prevent the stop display of the effect pattern 70a resulting from the above from becoming difficult to see.

(Production example of variation production pattern 1)
Using FIG. 119(a) and FIG. 120, an example of effect when "variation effect pattern 1" is determined in the variable effect start process described above will be described.

119(a) and FIG. 120, in the icon change effect determination process described above, "blue character icon" is determined as the final icon state, and "scenario 02" is selected as the change scenario. It is assumed that the variable effect (variable effect pattern 1) is determined and "symbol action change pattern 01" is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the above-described icon display mode update process.

At timing T00, as shown in FIG. 120(a), the variable display of all the effect symbols 70a is started, and the variable display of the special effect symbols TZ is also started. In addition, "1" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(b), after the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left variable display area, as shown in FIG. 120(c), " 4" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, at timing T01, the effect symbol 70a of "change" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, and an effect such as a lightning bolt is displayed on the first display section 70B1 from the temporarily stopped and displayed changing symbol in the central variable display area. Appears toward the first pending icon (CD icon) H11, and when it hits, the display mode of the first pending icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the blue character icon, as shown in FIG. 120(d).

Here, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped and are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 120(e), the changing symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the central variable display area changes to "5", and the effect symbol 70a is a combination of "3", "5" and "4", and is temporarily stopped. is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120(f), when the effect symbol 70a stops shaking and the effect symbol 70a performs an action (movement, display) in which the effect symbol 70a shines, it is notified that the final stop display is performed. ing.

At the timing T02, the effect symbol 70a becomes the main stop display, the special effect symbol TZ becomes the stop display, and the variable effect ends (see FIG. 120(g)). Here, since the variable effect is finished, the variable icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the variable icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the temporary stop display is switched to the final stop display, an action (movement, display) such that the effect pattern 70a is illuminated makes it easier for the player to recognize that the final stop display has occurred. ing.
Note that such actions (operations, displays) are not limited to those that emit light. For example, it may be one that grows once and then returns to its original size, or if it is a pattern with a character, it may be one in which the character moves (poses, etc.).

(Production example of variation production pattern 2)
With reference to FIG. 121, an example of effect when "variation effect pattern 2" is determined in the variable effect start process described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 121(a), all the effect symbols 70a are started to be variably displayed, and at the same time, the special effect symbol TZ is also variably displayed. In addition, "4" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

After the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 121(b), all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed substantially simultaneously.

Here, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped and are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(c), when the effect symbol 70a stops shaking and the effect symbol 70a performs an action (movement, display) in which the effect symbol 70a shines, it is notified that the final stop display is performed. ing.

After that, the effect symbol 70a becomes the main stop display, the special effect symbol TZ becomes the stop display, and the variable effect ends (see FIG. 121(d)). Here, since the variable effect is finished, the variable icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the variable icon display area 70C is erased.

(Production example of variation production pattern 3)
Using FIG. 119(b) and FIG. 122, an example of effect when "variation effect pattern 3" is determined in the above-described change effect start process will be described.

At timing T10, as shown in FIG. 122(a), the variable display of all the effect symbols 70a is started, and the variable display of the special effect symbols TZ is also started. In addition, "0" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

After that, after the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right variable display area. is started (see FIG. 122(b)).

Here, the left and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped, and all the special performance symbols TZ are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Then, at the timing T12, the effect symbol 70a of "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center variable display area, and the normal ready-to-win is finished (see FIG. 122(c)).

Here, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped and are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122(d), when the effect symbol 70a stops shaking and the effect symbol 70a performs an action (movement, display) in which the effect symbol 70a shines, it is notified that the final stop display is performed. ing.

After that, the effect symbol 70a becomes the main stop display, the special effect symbol TZ becomes the stop display, and the variable effect ends (see FIG. 122(e)). Here, since the variable effect is finished, the variable icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the variable icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the normal reach is performed and the production pattern 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed in the final stop, the production pattern 70a in the center stops at the production pattern 70a shifted by a plurality of patterns from the production patterns 70a on the left and right sides. do. It should be noted that one pattern may be used instead of a plurality of patterns.

(Production example of variation production pattern 4)
Using FIG. 119(c), FIG. 123, and FIG. 124, an example of effect when "fluctuation effect pattern 4" is determined in the above-described change effect start process will be described.

At timing T20, as shown in FIG. 123(a), the variable display of all the effect symbols 70a is started, and the variable display of the special effect symbols TZ is also started. In addition, "1" is displayed as a reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

After that, after the "2" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left variable display area, the "2" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right variable display area. is started (see FIG. 123(b)).

Here, the left and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped, and all the special performance symbols TZ are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Then, at timing T22, when developing (shifting) from normal reach to SP reach, as shown in FIG. As shown, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach state is reduced and moved to the upper left end, and the character image C1 and the image in which the plurality of effect symbols 70a are rotating are displayed. is started.

In addition, when developing into SP reach, the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124(a), one effect pattern 70a (here, "3") indicating that it is lost out of a plurality of rotating effect patterns 70a stops, and the SP reach is increased. finish.

Then, at the timing T23, when the SP reach ends, as shown in FIG. While returning to the effect pattern 70a of the size that was displayed before, it is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

Here, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped and are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 124(d), when the effect symbol 70a stops shaking and the effect symbol 70a performs an action (movement, display) in which the effect symbol 70a shines, it is notified that the final stop display is performed. ing.

After that, the effect symbol 70a becomes the main stop display, and the special effect symbol TZ becomes the stop display, and the variable effect ends (see FIG. 124(e)). Here, since the variable effect is finished, the variable icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the variable icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the SP reach (SPSP reach) is performed and the production pattern 70a indicating the loss is displayed at the final stop, unlike the case of the normal reach, the central production pattern 70a is replaced by the left and right production patterns 70a. It stops at the production pattern 70a shifted by one pattern.

Incidentally, while the white-out (or black-out) display is performed, the special effect symbol TZ is also displayed, but it may be displayed. In addition, if the display device other than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is also displaying the special effect symbol TZ, it may not be displayed.

Further, the first pending icon display area 70B, the variable icon display area 70C, and the second pending icon display area 70D may also be displayed. Also, if a display device other than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the first pending icon display area 70B, the variable icon display area 70C, and the second pending icon display area 70D, they should not be displayed. You can do it.

(Production example of variation production pattern 9)
Using FIG. 119(d) and FIGS. 123 to 125, an example of effect when "variation effect pattern 9" is determined in the above-described change effect start process will be described.

At timing T30, as shown in FIG. 123(a), the variable display of all the effect symbols 70a is started, and the variable display of the special effect symbols TZ is also started.

After that, after the effect symbol 70a of "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a of "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right variable display area. is started (see FIG. 123(b)).

Here, the left and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped, and all the special performance symbols TZ are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Then, at timing T32, when developing (shifting) from normal reach to SP reach, as shown in FIG. As shown, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach state is reduced and moved to the upper left end, and the character image C1 and the image in which the plurality of effect symbols 70a are rotating are displayed. is started.

In addition, when developing into SP reach, the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124(a), one effect pattern 70a (here, "3") indicating that it is lost out of a plurality of rotating effect patterns 70a stops, and the SP reach is increased. finish.

Then, at the timing T33, when the SP reach ends, as shown in FIG. While returning to the effect pattern 70a of the size that was displayed before, it is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

Here, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped and are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 125(a), an operation prompting image BG prompting an operation of the effect button 17 is displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped.

At timing T34, the effect button 17 is operated, or the operation effective time of the effect button 17 has elapsed, so that the movable effect member 73 is moved and a temporary stop display is displayed as shown in FIG. 125(b). After the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed is variably displayed again (after the resurrection effect), the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.

After that, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a big win, and after performing white-out (or black-out) display as shown in FIG. 125(c), it is enlarged as shown in FIG. 125(d). The displayed effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

Here, all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, but the special performance symbols TZ are not temporarily stopped and are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 125(e), the temporary stop display is continued while returning the production pattern 70a to the normal size.

Then, as shown in FIG. 125(f), the swaying effect symbol 70a stops shaking and the effect symbol 70a performs an action (movement, display) such that it shines, thereby notifying that the final stop display is performed. ing.

After that, the effect symbol 70a becomes the main stop display, the special effect symbol TZ becomes the stop display, and the variable effect ends (see FIG. 125(g)). Here, since the variable effect is finished, the variable icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the variable icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable effect pattern (variable effect patterns 1 and 2) in which the effect pattern 70a indicating that it is not a reach but a loss is displayed in the main stop, and the variation that becomes the SP reach and the SPSP reach The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production pattern 70a is different between the production patterns (variable production patterns 4 to 13). Specifically, the fluctuation production patterns (variation production patterns 4 to 13) that become SP reach and SPSP reach are the fluctuation production patterns (variation production pattern 1 , 2), the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production pattern 70a is longer.

In addition, in the present embodiment, SP reach and SP SP reach may execute a resurrection effect (resurrection stimulating effect) or a re-lottery effect, so a variable effect pattern ( The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production pattern 70a is different between the variable production patterns 1 to 3) and the variable production patterns (variable production patterns 4 to 13) in which the resurrection production and the re-lottery production can be executed. It can also be said that there is

In this way, the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production pattern 70a in the variable production patterns 4 to 13 in which the production (resurrection production, re-lottery production) can occur during the temporary stop display is during the temporary stop display. By making the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the performance pattern 70a in the variable performance patterns 1 to 3 in which the performance (resurrection performance, re-lottery performance) cannot occur, the player can enjoy the temporary stop display. It is possible to raise the expectation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a indicating that it is not a ready-to-win but a losing effect is a variable effect pattern (variable effect patterns 1 and 2) in which the main stop display is performed, and the effect pattern 70a that indicates a big hit is the main one. The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production design 70a is different between the variable production patterns (variable production patterns 8 to 13) to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, the production pattern 70a indicating that the big hit is the final stop display of the production pattern 70a that indicates that the variation production pattern (variation production patterns 8 to 13) is not a reach and is a loss. The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the production design 70a is longer than the fluctuation production patterns (variation production patterns 1 to 3) to be displayed.

In this way, since the execution time of the temporary stop display of the performance pattern 70a indicating the big win is long, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment for the big win, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable effect patterns (variable effect patterns 4 to 13) having a longer execution time of the temporary stop display before the final stop display of the effect pattern 70a are the temporary stop before the final stop display of the effect pattern 70a. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the variable performance patterns (variable performance patterns 1 to 3) having a short display execution time.

In this way, since the execution time of the temporary stop display of the production pattern 70a also indicates the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot, it is possible to draw attention to the second half (just before the end) of the variable production, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a variable production pattern (variable production pattern 3) that becomes normal reach and a variable production pattern (variable production patterns 4 to 13) that becomes SP reach (SPSP reach), revival production and re-lottery production are performed. The percentage of execution is different. Specifically, the variable performance patterns (variable performance patterns 4 to 13) that become SP reach (SPSP reach) rather than the variable performance pattern that becomes normal reach (variable performance pattern 3) execute revival performance and re-lottery performance. are more likely to do so.
Furthermore, the variable performance patterns (variable performance patterns 4 to 13) that become SP reach (SPSP reach) are more likely than the variable performance pattern that becomes normal reach (variable performance pattern 3) to temporarily stop display before the main stop display of the performance pattern 70a. has a longer execution time.

In this way, the variable effect pattern with a longer execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect pattern 70a has a higher ratio of execution of the resurrection effect and the re-lottery effect executed during the temporary stop display. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the execution time of the temporary stop display before the final stop display of the production pattern 70a, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the resurrection effect (including the resurrection inciting effect), the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a. In other words, the patterns (variation performance patterns 4 to 13) are more likely to execute the performance prompting the operation of the performance button 17 during the temporary stop display of the performance pattern 70a than the variation performance pattern (variation performance pattern 3) with normal reach. can also

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable effect patterns (variable effect patterns 1 and 2) in which the effect pattern 70a indicating a loss without being a reach is displayed in a permanent stop display are the SP reach and the SP reach. The icon change effect (symbol action change pattern 01) is more likely to be executed during the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a than the effect patterns 4 to 13).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a indicating that it is not a ready-to-win but a losing effect pattern 70a that shows that the variable effect pattern (variable effect patterns 1 to 3) in which the final stop display is performed is a big hit. The icon change effect (symbol action change pattern 01) is more likely to be executed while the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped than the change effect patterns (variation effect patterns 8 to 13) in which is displayed in a permanent stop.

In this way, the icon change effect (symbol action change pattern 01) is executed during the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a in the variable effect pattern with a low jackpot winning expectation than the variable effect pattern with a high jackpot winning expectation. Since it is easy to do so, even when the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is low, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable performance and improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the effect symbol 70a is performing the temporary stop display, the special effect symbol TZ is not displayed to be temporarily stopped. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the fluctuation state of the special symbols without causing misunderstanding.

In this embodiment, the temporary stop display is performed before the final stop display, but the final stop display may be performed without performing the temporary stop display. For example, in the time-saving game state, if the effect symbol 70a indicating that it is not a ready-to-win game and is displayed as a final stop, the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed as shown in FIG. From the state (see FIG. 126(a)), the temporary stop display may be replaced by the final stop display (see FIG. 126(b)). Further, in the time saving game state, the temporary stop display may be performed when the normal variable performance is executed, and the temporary stop display may not be performed when the shortened variable performance is executed. Also, in this way, when the temporary stop display is not performed, the action (operation, display) that is performed during the main stop display, such as the effect pattern 70a shining, may not be performed.

That is, during the time-saving game state, when the number of reservations is 1 or 2, since the normal fluctuation effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a performs a temporary stop display, and when the execution time of the temporary stop display elapses, the effect After performing the action (operation, display) such that the symbol 70a shines, the main stop display is executed, but during the time saving game state, when the number of reservations is 3 or 4, the shortened variable effect is executed. Therefore, it can be said that the effect symbol 70a performs the temporary stop display and the actual stop display without performing the action (operation, display) such that the effect symbol 70a shines.
Furthermore, during the normal game state, the temporary stop display is displayed even when the normal variable effect (when the number of reservations is 1 or 2) is executed and when the shortened variable effect (when the number of reservations is 3 or 4) is executed. Since it is executed, it is during the normal game state and the shortened variable effect (when the number of reservations is 3 or 4) is in the time-saving game state than when the shortened variable effect (when the number of reservations is 3 or 4) is executed. or 4) is executed, it can be said that the confirmation display (temporary stop display, final stop display) is shorter.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table of the present embodiment, when the reach is not reached and the number of reservations is 1 or 2, the normal variation effect is executed, and when the number of reservations is 3 or 4, the shortened variation effect is executed. However, regardless of the number of reservations, the normal variation effect and the shortened variation effect may be executable. Even in this case, when the number of reservations is 1 or 2, the normal variation performance is easier to execute than the shortened variation performance, and when the number of reservations is 3 or 4, the shortened variation performance is executed rather than the normal variation performance. It should be easy to do.

Further, instead of determining whether or not to execute the shortened variable performance by the number of reservations, it may be determined whether to execute the shortened variable performance by the game state. For example, in a time-saving game state, when the number of reservations is 1 or 2, a shortened variable performance is executed, and when the number of reservations is 3 or 4, a super-shortened variable performance whose variable time is shorter than that of the shortened variable performance is executed. Alternatively, if it is a time-saving game state, regardless of the number of reservations, if it does not become a reach, the shortened variable effect may be executed.

The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect pattern 70a according to the type of the variable effect pattern in the present embodiment is: variable effect pattern 2 (shortened variable effect) <variable effect pattern 1 (normal variable effect)<variable effect Pattern 3 (normal reach production) <variation production patterns 4 to 13 (SP reach production, SPSP reach production, revival production, revival inciting production, re-lottery production) were made to be longer in order, but fluctuation production pattern 4 ~ 13 (SP reach production, SPSP reach production, revival production, revival incitement production, re-lottery production) <Variation production pattern 3 (normal reach production) <Variation production pattern 1 (normal fluctuation production) <Variation production pattern 2 (shortened fluctuation production ) may be longer in order.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the resurrection effect is performed, the definite effect of notifying (notifying) that the jackpot will be achieved is not regulated, but it may be regulated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance whether or not the resurrection effect will be executed.

In addition, even when the fixed performance is regulated, it may not be regulated during the temporary stop display when performing the resurrection performance, or the fixed performance may be executed before the temporary stop display for the resurrection performance and the temporary stop. It may be regulated only during display.

Also, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, but the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. In this case, the execution time of the temporary stop display before changing again the effect symbol 70a in the pseudo continuous effect should be shorter than the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the fluctuation state of the special symbols without causing misunderstanding.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed, the pseudo-continuous effect is usually executed in a variable effect pattern with a high probability of winning a jackpot (because the number of times of execution tends to increase). Even when the total execution time of the stop display is compared, the variable performance patterns (variable performance patterns 8 to 13) in which the performance pattern 70a indicating the big win is actually stopped and displayed are not the ready-to-win but the losing. The total execution time of the temporary stop display of the production design 70a tends to be longer than the fluctuation production patterns (variation production patterns 1 to 3) in which the production design 70a shown is actually stopped and displayed.

In addition, since the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at a high rate in a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (because the number of times of execution tends to increase), the more times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the longer the execution time of the temporary stop display. It can be said that it is. For example, if the number of pseudo-continuous effects is 1, SP reach or SPSP reach is not executed, and if the pseudo-continuous effects are executed 2 or 3 times, SP reach or SPSP reach is executed. You should do it like this.
Further, the execution time of the temporary stop display may be longer when the pseudo continuous effect is executed than when it is not executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect is executed rather than when it is not executed. The display execution time may be made longer.

Similarly, in the icon change effect, a display mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, a red icon) is more likely to be temporarily stopped than a display mode with a low expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, a blue icon). It can be said that the execution time is getting longer.

Further, when the pseudo continuous effect is performed, when performing the temporary stop display before the effect symbol 70a is changed again, special symbols suggesting that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed (for example, "NEXT" symbol, "continued" symbol etc.) may be temporarily stopped.
In addition, the execution time of the temporary stop display before changing the production pattern 70a again may be increased or shortened as the number of times of re-change increases, and the same execution is performed regardless of the number of times. It can be time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is provided as the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to the icon change effect. For example, it may be a character look-ahead effect in which a specific character is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, or a chance effect in which a specific combination of effect symbols 70a is stopped and displayed over a plurality of variable effects, or the effect pattern 70a. The color of the production pattern 70a may be changed depending on the type of the same color pattern production, and the production pattern 70a of the same color may be stop-displayed over a plurality of variable productions.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the normal reach is performed and the production pattern 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed in the final stop, the production pattern 70a in the center is shifted by a plurality of patterns from the production patterns 70a on the left and right sides. When the performance symbol 70a indicating that the SP reach (SPSP reach) is performed and the loss is performed and the performance symbol 70a is displayed as the main stop, the center performance symbol 70a is 1 more than the left and right performance symbols 70a. Although it was made to stop at the production pattern 70a shifted by the design, regardless of the reach type, when the production pattern 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed at the final stop, the center production pattern 70a is the left and right side production patterns. It is also possible to stop at a performance symbol 70a shifted by one symbol or by a plurality of symbols from 70a. In this case, when the production pattern 70a indicating that the normal reach is performed and the loss is displayed, the production pattern 70a shifted by a plurality of patterns is more likely to be stopped than by one pattern, and the SP reach is performed. When (SPSP reach) is performed and the production pattern 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed in a final stop, the production pattern 70a shifted by one pattern should be easier to stop than by a plurality of patterns.

Further, in the present embodiment, in normal reach, the resurrection effect and the re-lottery effect are not executed, but they may be executed. In this case, SP ready-to-win and SPSP ready-to-win should make it easier to execute resurrection effect and re-lottery effect than normal ready-to-win.

Also, in the present embodiment, the resurrection effect is executed, but the type of resurrection effect is not limited to this embodiment. For example, when all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a combination indicating that it is lost as a result of the SP reach production, a predetermined production (for example, the production of displaying the operation promotion image, the movement of the movable production member 73, etc. ) is performed, the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is changed again, and the production may be such that it develops into the SPSP ready-to-win production.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect of operating the effect button 17 is performed in the resurrection effect. You can do it. In this case, it is sufficient to make it easy to execute the resurrection effect for performing the effect of operating the effect button 17 in the case of a big win. Further, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to easily execute a resurrection effect in which the effect of operating the effect button 17 is not performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even when the special effect pattern 70a becomes the ready-to-win, all the special effect patterns TZ are changed and displayed without becoming the ready-to-win. You may make it become a reach similarly to.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect is provided as the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to the icon change effect.

For example, a read-ahead sound effect may be executed in which a read-ahead sound is continuously output over a plurality of variable effects, or the background image may be changed from a normal background image to a special background image over a plurality of variable effects. At the same time, BGM or the like may also be effected such as a zone performance in which special BGM or the like sounds are continuously output.

When the look-ahead sound effect or the zone effect is being performed, the variable effect sound (fluctuation sound, BGM, etc.) that is output when the normal variable effect is performed may not be output. When outputting the fluctuating effect sound, it may be output at a volume smaller than the sound in the look-ahead sound effect or the zone effect, or may be output at an inaudible volume.

Also, the sound in the look-ahead sound effect and zone effect was output with priority over the fluctuation effect sound, but when the reach effect is performed, the sound in the reach effect is output with priority, and the sound in the look-ahead effect The sound in the sound effect and the zone effect should be output at a volume lower than that in the reach effect, or output at an inaudible volume. Further, when the ready-to-win effect is started, the look-ahead sound effect and the zone effect may end. Also, the look-ahead sound effect and the zone effect may not end (continue) in the normal reach, and end in the SP reach (SPSP reach).

In addition, the sound in the look-ahead sound effect and zone effect is output in the variable effect before the change effect that is the target of the look-ahead sound effect and zone effect. You may make it change with the sound which does. In this case, the rate at which the sound changes may be varied in accordance with the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. For example, when the expectation of winning a jackpot is high, it may be changed easily (always changed), or when the expectation of winning a jackpot is low, it may be changed easily (always changed) good).

Moreover, regardless of whether or not the look-ahead sound effect or the zone effect is being executed, the same type (content) of variable effect may be executed.

(Fourth embodiment)
The fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 127 to 146. FIG. Here, the description of the same parts as in the first embodiment is omitted, and the different parts are described.

[Description of Transition from First Display Mode to Second Display Mode]
First, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129, the transition of the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ displayed on the first image display device 70 in the fourth embodiment will be described. 127A and 127B are diagrams for explaining the transition of the display mode when displaying in the normal reach mode in the first display mode. FIG. 128 is a diagram explaining the transition of the display mode when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the display mode when displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode.

As shown in FIGS. 127 to 129, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ in the fourth embodiment changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. In the first display mode, at least two of the performance symbol rows 70a composed of three performance symbol rows are stopped, and one non-stop performance symbol row is variably displayed, and 3 At least two symbol rows out of the special effect symbol TZ composed of two symbol rows are stopped, and one symbol row which is not stopped is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the first display mode, in at least one of the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol cannot be visually recognized, that is, it is an unrecognizable display mode. Also, in the special effect symbol TZ, at least one of the three symbol rows is displayed in such a manner that the symbol row cannot be recognized. On the other hand, in the second display mode, all of the three effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped, all of the three symbol rows of the special effect symbol TZ are also stopped, and all the effect symbol rows and symbol rows are visible. It is possible, that is, a recognizable aspect of the display.

As shown in FIG. 127(a), when the first display mode is displayed in the mode of normal reach, for example, the two effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed with the same effect symbol such as "7". The two symbol rows of the special performance symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed at the symbol "7" corresponding to the effect symbol "7" which is stopped and displayed, and one symbol row is variably displayed. ing. Next, as one aspect of the second display aspect after being displayed in the aspect of normal reach, as shown in FIG. As one production pattern row is "3", it is displayed in a reach-losing suggesting mode stopped and displayed with a production pattern different from the production pattern of the production pattern row stopped and displayed in the first display mode, and a special production pattern. Also in TZ, there is one that is stop-displayed in a reach-losing suggestive mode consisting of symbols corresponding to the stop-displayed effect symbol 70a. Further, as another mode of the second display mode after being displayed in the mode of normal reach, as shown in FIG. One production pattern row is displayed in a jackpot suggesting mode stopped and displayed with the same production pattern as the production pattern of the production pattern row that was stopped and displayed in the first display mode, such as "7", and in the special production pattern TZ. There is also one that is stop-displayed in a jackpot suggesting mode consisting of symbols corresponding to the stop-displayed effect symbol 70a.

As shown in FIG. 128(a), in the first display mode when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, for example, the two effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed with the same effect symbol such as "7". The two symbol rows of the special performance symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed at the symbol "7" corresponding to the effect symbol "7" which is stopped and displayed, and one symbol row is variably displayed. ing. Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), a battle effect, which is an SP ready-to-win effect in which the friend character C2 and the enemy character C3 face off, is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 128(c), when the friendly character C2 is defeated in the battle effect, as one mode of the second display mode, as shown in FIG. There is a stop display in a reach-loss suggesting mode after returning to the original size, and a stop-display in a reach-loss suggesting mode in the special effect symbol TZ. Further, as shown in FIG. 128(e), when the friendly character C2 wins in the battle effect, as another aspect of the second display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 128(f), an effect pattern 70a In , there is a stop display in a jackpot suggesting mode after returning to the original size, and a special production pattern TZ that is stopped in a jackpot suggesting mode. In addition, in FIGS. 128(c) and 128(e), although the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and all the effect symbols can be recognized, at least one symbol row of the special effect symbol TZ is displayed. is a display mode in which is variably displayed. In this embodiment, the display time of FIG. 128(c) is 2 seconds, and the display time of FIG. 128(e) is 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), when it is displayed in the non-reach mode as the first display mode, the two performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are different from each other such as "7" and "1". , and one effect pattern row is variably displayed, and the two pattern rows of the special effect symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed with symbols corresponding to the stop-displayed effect symbols "7" and "1", and 1 One symbol row is displayed in a floating manner. Then, as one aspect of the second display aspect after being displayed in the non-reach aspect in the first display aspect, for example, as shown in FIG. One production pattern row is displayed in a non-reach loss suggesting mode in which production patterns different from two production patterns in the production pattern row stopped and displayed in the first display mode are stopped and displayed, such as "2", Even in the special production pattern TZ, there is a stop display in a non-reach-losing suggestive mode.

[Explanation of end-of-variation suggestion effect]
130 and 131, the change end suggesting effect will be described next. FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining an example of the fluctuation end suggesting effect, and FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining another example of the fluctuation end suggesting effect. The effect suggesting the end of fluctuation is a effect that is executed at a predetermined timing before the stop display of the effect symbol 70a. Especially, it is executed immediately before the second display mode in which the effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ are to be changed. It is a production that suggests the end of this fluctuation by being done. In this variable end suggesting effect, all the effect patterns can be recognized because the three effect symbol rows are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol 70a, but at least one symbol row is variably displayed in the special effect symbol TZ. ing. Note that the change end suggesting effect is not necessarily executed between the first display mode and the second display mode, and may be changed to the second display mode without being executed after the first display mode.

As shown in FIG. 130, as one specific example of the effect suggesting the end of fluctuation, for example, each of the effect symbols of the effect symbols 70a that are stopped and displayed vibrates. there is something The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 130(a) is displayed in the normal ready-to-win mode in the first display mode or when the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and when the reach-losing suggesting mode in the second display mode. 127(a)→FIG. 130(a)→FIG. 127(b), or FIG. 128(c)→FIG. 130(a)→FIG. 128(d ) can be executed when there is a transition such as 130(b) is displayed in the first display mode in the normal ready-to-win mode or when the SP ready-to-win mode is executed, and in the second display mode as the jackpot suggesting mode. 127(a)→FIG. 130(b)→FIG. 127(c), or FIG. 128(e)→FIG. 130(b)→FIG. It can be made to be executed when there is a transition as in (f). Furthermore, the fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 130(c) is executed when it is displayed when the first display mode is the non-reach mode and the second display mode is the non-reach loss suggesting mode. Yes, for example, it can be executed when there is a transition from FIG. 129(a)→FIG. 130(c)→FIG. 129(b).

As shown in FIG. 131, as another specific example of the effect suggesting the end of fluctuation, for example, a change suggesting end of fluctuation is displayed in the vicinity of the stop-displayed effect pattern 70a so that each of the effect patterns glitters as a background image HG. is displayed. The variable end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 131(a) is displayed in the normal ready-to-win mode in the first display mode or when the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and when the reach-losing suggesting mode in the second display mode. 127(a)→FIG. 131(a)→FIG. 127(b), or FIG. 129(c)→FIG. 131(a)→FIG. 129(d ) can be executed when there is a transition such as 131(b) is displayed in the normal ready-to-win mode in the first display mode or when the SP ready-to-win mode is executed, and in the second display mode to suggest the jackpot. 127(a)→FIG. 131(b)→FIG. 127(c), or FIG. 128(e)→FIG. 131(b)→FIG. It can be made to be executed when there is a transition as in (f). Furthermore, the fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 131(c) is executed when the first display mode is the non-reach mode and the second display mode is the non-reach loss suggesting mode. 129(a)→FIG. 131(c)→FIG. 129(b).

In this embodiment, for example, compared to the display times of FIGS. 127(c) and 128(f), the display times of FIGS. 127(b) and 128(d) are shorter. The display time shall be even shorter. That is, the time during which the second display mode is displayed is set to be longer in the order of the jackpot suggesting mode, reach-losing suggesting mode, and non-reach-losing suggesting mode. Also, for example, the display time of FIGS. 130(b) and 131(b) is 3 seconds, the display time of FIGS. 130(a) and 131(a) is 1.5 seconds, and the display time of FIG. ) and FIG. 131(c) are assumed to be 0.5 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the variation end suggesting effect is set so as to increase in descending order of the possibility of a big win.

[Description of pseudo continuous effect]
Next, the pseudo continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pseudo continuous effect when displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode, and FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of continuous production. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode. It is an effect executed between the mode and the end-of-fluctuation suggesting effect. For example, after displaying in the normal reach or non-reach mode in the first display mode, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed by suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), in the pseudo continuous effect when displayed in the normal ready-to-win mode in the first display mode, first, one effect symbol row of the normal ready-to-win mode effect symbol 70a in the first display mode is displayed. A pseudo-continuous display such as "chance" is displayed in the area that was being displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 132(b), all the symbol rows of the production symbol 70a are variably displayed again. Next, after the variable display for the second time, as shown in FIG. 132(c), the two symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are again stop-displayed with the same symbol such as "7", and one symbol row is variably displayed. . Then, as shown in FIG. 132(d), although the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and all the effect symbols can be recognized, at least one symbol row of the special effect symbol TZ is variably displayed. display mode.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), in the pseudo continuous effect when displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode, first, one symbol row of the non-reach mode effect symbol 70a in the first display mode A pseudo-continuous display such as "chance" is displayed in the area where was displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 133(b), all the symbol rows of the production symbol 70a are again variably displayed. Then, after the variable display for the second time, as shown in FIG. 133(c), the two symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are stopped and displayed with the same symbol such as "7", and one symbol row is variably displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 133(d), although the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and all the effect symbols can be recognized, at least one symbol row of the special effect symbol TZ is variably displayed. display mode.

It should be noted that, in the above-described pseudo-continuous effect, the case where the first display mode is simply displayed in the normal reach or non-reach mode has been explained, but a chance that suggests a change in the effect mode, that is, a chance that extends over a plurality of variations It may be combined with an effect in which the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with the eyes. For example, after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the chance eye, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. Moreover, after the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the chance eye, the SP ready-to-win production may be executed. Also, in the above-described pseudo continuous effect, the display time of FIG. 132(d) is assumed to be 2 seconds. Furthermore, when the second display mode is in the ready-to-lose suggesting mode, the special effect symbol TZ may be variably displayed, but the effect symbol 70a may be recognizable in the ready-to-lose mode, and this display time. may be 1 second.

Further, in the above-described pseudo-continuous effect, one pseudo-continuous effect from the display of the temporary stop state of FIGS. 132(a) and 133(a) to the display of FIGS. 132(d) and 133(d) is executed, but it is also possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect two or three times. Specifically, in FIG. 132 or FIG. 133, there is a mode of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... or a mode of (a)→(b)→(a)→... It is also possible to execute a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects such as . 132 or 133 (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → . )→(a)→ . 132(a) is two seconds, the display time of FIG. 133(a) is one second. 132(d) is longer than the temporary stop display time of FIG. 132(a), or the display time of FIG. 133(d) is longer than the temporary stop display time of FIG. 133(a). may be longer.

[Description of resurrection production]
Next, the resurrection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 134 . FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example of a resurrection effect when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the resurrection effect is a effect that is executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode. It is an effect executed between the mode and the end-of-fluctuation suggesting effect. For example, in the battle effect in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 face off in the SP ready-to-win effect after the first display mode described with reference to FIG. , in which the battle effect is executed again. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134(a), a display mode is displayed that indicates that the ally character C2 has been defeated in the battle presentation and suggests that the battle presentation is to end. At this time, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and all the special production patterns TZ are displayed in a variable manner. is maintained. Next, as shown in FIG. 134(b), a resurrection suggestion display such as "resurrection" is displayed in the area where the presentation of the confrontation between the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 was displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 134(c), the allied character C2 and the enemy character C3 become larger than before the defeat and the enemy character C3 becomes smaller than before the victory. A showdown is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 134(d), characters such as "Victory" are displayed in the area where the presentation of the confrontation between the friend character C2 and the enemy character C3 was displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 134(e), it is a display suggesting that the friendly character C2 wins the battle effect and ends the battle effect, and the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed. Although all the performance symbols are recognizable, at least one symbol row of the special performance symbols TZ is variably displayed. It should be noted that the display time of FIG. 134(e) is assumed to be 1 second in the resurrection effect described above.

In the resurrection effect described above, the characters "victory" are displayed before the display mode indicating the end of the battle effect indicating the victory of the friendly character C2 is displayed. It does not have to be from For example, as shown in FIG. 134(f), although the special effect symbol TZ is variably displayed, a darkening effect may be executed in which the entire background image HG turns black. That is, the resurrection effect may be performed in such a manner as FIG. 134(c)→FIG. 134(f)→FIG. 134(e). In addition, in the above-described resurrection effect, the mode in which the player wins in the post-resurrection battle effect and shifts to the second display mode to the jackpot suggestion mode has been described. It may be a mode that changes to a reach loss suggestion mode. In such a resurrection effect in the case of losing, for example, it may be a form of transition such as FIG. 134(c)→FIG. 134(f)→FIG. 128(c).

It can be said that the above-described battle effect, resurrection effect, and pseudo-continuous effect are effects that improve the degree of expectation that the big win suggestive mode will occur before the so-called second display mode. In addition, since the effect is executed in such a manner that the degree of expectation is gradually improved as the execution time of the effect elapses, it can be said that the effect is an effect that gradually increases the degree of expectation. In addition, the effect can be made such that the recognizable state of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times during one variation of the special effect symbol TZ.

[Description of other embodiments]
Next, another example of the fluctuation end suggesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 142. FIG. Each of FIGS. 135 to 141 is another example of the fluctuation end suggesting effect, and is a diagram for explaining one example, and FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining an example of the fluctuation end suggesting effect in the effect symbol 5470a.

The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 135 is such that each of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a itself moves to change its position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(a), although the stop-displayed "7" effect symbol moves upward, the position of one effect symbol row of the variably displayed effect symbol 70a is It appears unchanged. Next, as shown in FIG. 135(b), the performance symbol row that has been variably displayed is stopped while the position of the performance symbol that has been moved is maintained. Then, as shown in FIG. 135(c), the position of the effect pattern that has been moved upward changes and returns to the position where the original effect pattern 70a was displayed, and all the effect patterns 70a are stopped and displayed. be.

The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 136 is a mode in which a fluctuation end suggesting display in the form of a shutter door is displayed as the background image HG in the vicinity of the effect pattern 70a which is displayed in one effect pattern row. belongs to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136(a), in a state in which the production pattern 70a in which one production pattern row is variably displayed is recognizable, a shutter door opening on both sides of the production pattern 70a is displayed. A change end suggestion display is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 136(b), the fluctuation end suggestion display changes so that the shutter door closes, and all the production patterns 70a become invisible. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(c), the fluctuation end suggesting display changes so that the closed shutter door opens, and all the production patterns 70a become recognizable.

The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 137(a) is a mode in which each of the effect symbols of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a itself vibrates a predetermined behavior. The mode of vibration shown in FIG. 137(a) is different from the mode shown in FIG. Specifically, the vibration of the production pattern 70a shown in FIG. 130 is a mode of vibrating in small steps in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the vibration of the production pattern 70a shown in FIG. It is a mode that vibrates greatly. Next, the fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 137(b) is a mode in which each of the effect symbols of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a performs a predetermined behavior such that it shines. The shining mode shown in FIG. 137(b) is different from the mode shown in FIG. Specifically, in the production design 70a shown in FIG. 131, the background image HG is such that the vicinity of the periphery of each production design glitters, whereas in the production design 70a shown in FIG. The shining mode is a mode in which each of the performance symbols of the statically displayed performance symbols 70a itself shines. The variation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 137 is executed, for example, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, and the variation pattern that is the non-reach-loss suggestion mode and the reach-loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. 130 or 131, the fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 130 or 131 may be executed. That is, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, although it is a variation end suggestion performance similar to the variation end suggestion performance in the non-reach loss suggestion mode such as vibration and shine and the reach loss suggestion mode, there is a unique It can be made into a thing of the aspect.

The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 138 is a form of executing a predetermined behavior such that each of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a itself is largely enlarged. Specifically, the normal size production pattern 70a shown in FIG. 138(a) is enlarged and becomes larger than the normal size production pattern shown in FIG. 138(b). In this mode, each of the production patterns of the production pattern 70a itself is enlarged and changed to be emphasized so as to become the production pattern. The variation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 138 may be executed, for example, in a variation pattern that is the jackpot suggesting mode in the second display mode. That is, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the variation end suggestion performance of a unique mode that is not executed as the variation end suggestion performance in the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the reach loss suggestion mode is executed. can.

The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 139 is a form of executing a predetermined behavior such that each of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a itself shrinks. Concretely, at least one of the performance symbol rows is changed in the performance symbol 70a larger than usual shown in FIG. 139(a), and the performance symbol 70a larger than usual shown in FIG. 139(b). All of the production pattern rows are stopped and displayed, and each of the production patterns of the production pattern 70a is reduced and becomes a smaller production pattern than the normal size production pattern shown in FIG. 139(c). It is a mode in which itself shrinks and changes. The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 139 may be executed, for example, in a fluctuation pattern that is the non-reach-losing suggesting mode or the reach-losing suggesting mode in the second display mode. In other words, in the variation pattern that is the non-reach-losing suggesting mode or the reach-losing suggesting mode in the second display mode, the variation end suggesting effect of a unique mode that is not executed as the variation end suggesting effect in the jackpot suggesting mode is executed. can.

The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 140 is such that the stop-displayed effect symbol 70a itself rotates in a predetermined manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140(a), each of the production designs of the production design 70a itself rotates in the same direction at the same speed, or as shown in FIG. It is a mode in which two production patterns are united and rotated. The variation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 140 may be executed, for example, in a variation pattern that is the jackpot suggesting mode in the second display mode. That is, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the variation end suggestion performance of a unique mode that is not executed as the variation end suggestion performance in the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the reach loss suggestion mode is executed. can.

141 is a mode in which the fusuma image FG is gradually closed while all the effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed to result in a big win, first, FIG. This is the scene where a suggestive display is made.

At this time, since the SP reach is in progress, the production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size. All the symbol rows of the special effect symbol TZ are variably displayed.
In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the first special figure reservation number indicating the current first special figure reservation number (U1), and the current second special figure "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F for displaying the second reservation number indicating the number of reservations (U2), and the variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 70C, The display of the first pending icon display area 70B and the display of the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, a fusuma image FG resembling a fusuma is gradually closed from both the left and right ends, and is displayed in a completely closed state as shown in FIG. 141(b).
Since the fusuma image FG is displayed as if it is gradually closing, the background image HG, the effect pattern 70a, the variable icon, and the character are gradually hidden from both left and right ends (gradually disappearing from view). .
In addition, even when the fusuma image FG is displayed in a completely closed state, the first special figure reserved number (first special figure reserved number display area 70E), the second special figure reserved number (second special figure reserved number The display area 70F) and the special effect symbol TZ continue to be displayed.

After that, the fusuma image FG that resembles a fusuma is displayed as if it is gradually opened, and as shown in FIG.
In addition, since the fusuma image FG is displayed so as to gradually open, the background image HG, the effect pattern 70a, the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the variable icon display area 70C It gradually becomes a display state from the center (becomes visible gradually).
Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a state of returning to the normal size.

Then, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 141(d). At this time, the special performance symbol TZ is also stopped and displayed, and the variation icon is erased.

Next, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed and results in a loss, the effects are performed in the order of FIG. 141(e)→FIG. 141(b)→FIG. 141(f)→FIG. 141(g). In addition, since it is the same as the case where the SP ready-to-win effect is executed and the jackpot is achieved, except that the combination of the displayed effect symbol 70a and the special effect symbol TZ is different, a specific description will be omitted.

In addition, in the fluctuation end suggestion production (display of fusuma image FG) shown in FIG. 2nd special figure reservation number display area 70F) was displayed, but the special production pattern TZ, the 1st special figure reservation number (1st special figure reservation number display area 70E), the 2nd special figure reservation number (the 2 special figure pending number display area 70F) may not be displayed, any one may not be displayed, or any two may not be displayed. Moreover, although the production design 70a and the variation icon are not displayed, both the production design 70a and the variation icon may be displayed, or either one of them may be displayed. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed during the SP reach production, and may not be displayed during the fluctuation end suggestion production (display of the fusuma image FG), or the hold icon may be displayed during the SP reach production. Alternatively, it may be displayed even during the effect indicating the end of the fluctuation (display of the fusuma image FG).

In addition, the fluctuation end suggesting effect (display of fusuma image FG) shown in FIG. If it fails, it may be made executable.

In addition, the fluctuation end suggesting effect (display of the fusuma image FG) shown in FIG. When the production (losing) is executed, it may be executable, and when it is not in the ready-to-win state or when the normal reach (losing) is executed, it is made unexecutable, and the SP reach production (losing, jackpot) or SP SP reach production. If (losing, jackpot) is executed, it may be executable.
In addition, when the normal reach effect (losing) is executed, the fluctuation end suggesting effect (display of the fusuma image FG) shown in FIG. is executed, the execution probability of the variable end suggesting effect (display of fusuma image FG) shown in FIG. In addition, it is good also as a reverse probability.

In addition, the fluctuation end suggesting effect (display of fusuma image FG) shown in FIG. The normal reach effect may not be executed. In this case, in the low probability game state, there is a possibility that the normal reach effect is executed, so when the reach effect (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) is executed, it is higher than the low probability game state. It can be said that the variation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 141 is more likely to be executed in the probability gaming state. It should be noted that the low-probability gaming state may make it easier to execute the fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 141 than the high-probability gaming state.

Further, the fluctuation end suggesting effect (display of the fusuma image FG) shown in FIG. 141 may be performed during the stop display of the effect pattern 70a (corresponding to the second period). Further, the fluctuation end suggesting effect (display of the fusuma image FG) shown in FIG. 141 may be performed over a predetermined timing (corresponding to the second period) from the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a to the stop display.

The fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 142 is a production pattern 5470a composed of a number portion 5470b having numbers as main components and a character portion 5470c imitating a predetermined character different for each number of the number portion 5470b. It is of the aspect performed by Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142(a), only the character portion 5470c vibrates or performs a predetermined action, or only the character portion 5470c shines. . Also, various effects may be performed not only in the character portion 5470c but also in the number portion 5470b. For example, the number portion 5470b may vibrate differently from the character portion 5470c shown in FIG. 142(a). Furthermore, in FIG. 142, although it was illustrated about the case where it becomes a reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode, the variation pattern as shown in FIG. A variable end suggestion effect may be executed.

Note that the above-described fluctuation end suggesting effects may not only be executed independently, but may be executed in a manner in which a plurality of fluctuation end suggesting effects are combined. For example, the effect pattern may behave in a predetermined manner, and the background image HG may be displayed in the vicinity of the background image HG to indicate the completion of the fluctuation. Specifically, in the stop-displayed production pattern 70a shown in FIG. 130, each of the production patterns itself vibrates in a predetermined manner, and each of the production patterns as the background image HG glitters in the vicinity of the periphery. It may be a mode in which the display and the display are combined. Further, in FIGS. 127 to 140, the production pattern 70a having numbers as the main constituent elements is explained, but various productions using the production pattern 5470a instead of the production pattern 70a may be executed. Alternatively, various effects may be executed in such a manner that the effect pattern 70a is changed to the effect pattern 5470a at a predetermined timing.

In the above-described embodiment, the display of the special effect symbol TZ from the first display mode to the second display mode was a mode in which at least one symbol row was variably displayed. It may be variably displayed. For example, in the special effect symbol TZ in the first display mode in FIGS. 127 to 129, all symbol rows may be variably displayed. 132 and 133, the special effect symbols TZ in the effect display of the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. may be Furthermore, all of the special effect symbols TZ in the effect display of the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 134 may be variably displayed during the execution of a series of effect displays or during the execution of a part of the effect displays.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the transition of the display mode when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed has been described. A transition may be performed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, immediately before the second display mode, the performance design itself performs a predetermined behavior. You may make it perform the predetermined production|presentation in. For example, after the second display mode of the reach-losing suggesting mode or the non-reach-losing suggesting mode, the performance pattern executes a performance in which a predetermined behavior different from the fluctuation end suggesting performance is executed, and all the performance symbols of the performance pattern 70a are executed. It is also possible to execute an effect in which the columns are variably displayed.

[Description of low-probability/high-probability fluctuation pattern]
With reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, the selectivity of the variation patterns combining the additional effects, which are the various effects described above, will be described next. Figure 143 is a diagram illustrating a low-probability variation pattern table, which is a variation pattern table in a low-probability gaming state, and Figure 144 is a diagram illustrating a high-probability variation pattern table, which is a variation pattern table in a high-probability gaming state. be. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, each of the low-probability variation pattern table and the high-probability variation pattern table has 15 variation patterns from variation pattern 1A to variation pattern 5C. These variation patterns 1A to 5C will be explained. In the low-probability fluctuation pattern table and the high-probability fluctuation pattern table, there is a fluctuation pattern represented by "variation pattern" + "number" + "alphabet", but when "variation pattern" + "number" is the same , the first display mode and the second display mode have similar variation patterns. For example, the variation pattern 2A and the variation pattern 2B are the same in that the first display mode is the normal reach, and the second display mode is the same in the reach-loss suggestion mode. Further, the additional effect refers to any one of the resurrection effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the change end suggesting effect, and the effect in which these effects are combined.

A variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which the first display mode is displayed in a non-reach mode and the second display mode is a non-reach loss suggesting mode. Among these, the variation pattern 1A is a pattern in which no additional effect is executed, and is selected with a probability of 85% in the low probability game state and 87% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 1B is a pattern in which only a variation end suggestive effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 5% in the low probability game state and 3% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 1C is a pattern in which only the pseudo continuous effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 10% in the low probability game state and 10% in the high probability game state.

The variation pattern 2 is a variation pattern when the first display mode is displayed in the normal reach mode and the second display mode is the reach-loss suggestion mode. Of these, the variation pattern 2A is a pattern in which only the variation end suggestive effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 70% in the low probability game state and 65% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 2B is a pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect and a variable end suggestive effect are executed as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 5% in the low probability game state and 5% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 2C is a pattern in which only a pseudo continuous effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 25% in the low probability game state and 30% in the high probability game state.

Variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed as the first display mode and the ready-to-win losing suggestion mode is used as the second display mode. Among them, the variation pattern 3A is a pattern in which only the variation end suggestive effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 60% in the low probability game state and 60% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 3B is a pattern in which a resurrection performance and a variable end suggestive performance are executed as additional performances, and is selected with a probability of 10% in the low probability game state and 5% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 3C is a pattern in which only a resurrection effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 30% in the low-probability game state and 35% in the high-probability game state.

A variation pattern 4 is a variation pattern in which the first display mode is displayed in the mode of normal reach and the second display mode is the jackpot suggestion mode. Among them, the variation pattern 4A is a pattern in which only the variation end suggesting effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 15% in the low probability game state and 15% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 4B is a pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect and a variable end suggestive effect are executed as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 65% in the low probability game state and 60% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 4C is a pattern in which only the pseudo continuous effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 20% in the low probability game state and 25% in the high probability game state.

A variation pattern 5 is a variation pattern in which the SP ready-to-win effect is executed as the first display mode and the jackpot suggestion mode is performed as the second display mode. Of these, the variation pattern 5A is a pattern in which only the variation end suggestive effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 20% in the low probability game state and 15% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 5B is a pattern in which a resurrection effect and a variable end suggestive effect are executed as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 65% in the low probability game state and 65% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 5C is a pattern in which only the resurrection effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 15% in the low probability game state and 20% in the high probability game state.

In the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, the variation end suggesting effects of different modes are executed for each of the variation patterns 1 to 5. For example, in the low-probability gaming state, the variation pattern 1 is a mode as shown in FIG. 130, the variation pattern 2 is a mode as shown in FIG. 131, and the variation pattern 3 is FIG. In the variation pattern 4, it is a mode as shown in FIG. 137(b), and in the variation pattern 5, it is a mode as shown in FIG. Also, in each of the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, although the variation patterns are the same, the variation end suggesting effects of different modes are executed. For example, in the low-probability gaming state as described above, in the high-probability gaming state, the variation pattern 1 is in the mode as shown in FIG. 131, and the variation pattern 2 is in the mode as shown in FIG. There, in the variation pattern 3, it is a mode as shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the variation pattern 4, it is a mode as shown in FIG. It shall be such a mode.

In addition, the fluctuation end suggesting effect may not be executed in the case of the fluctuation pattern in which the first display mode is the non-reach mode, or the variation in the case of the normal reach mode as the first display mode. If it is a pattern, it may not be executed, and if it is a variation pattern in the case of a non-reach aspect as the first display aspect, and a variation pattern in the case of a normal reach aspect as the first display aspect , it may not be executed. Also, it may not be executed when a big win is achieved, and may be executed when a loss is achieved.

Also, in the high probability variation pattern table which is the variation pattern table in the high probability game state of FIG. 144, normal reach is executed, but normal reach may not be performed in the high probability game state.
In addition, although the normal reach is executable in the non-time-saving game state, it may be unexecutable in the time-saving game state.

In addition, normal ready-to-win is not executed in the high-probability game state, and if the variation pattern is the non-reach mode as the first display mode, the fluctuation end suggesting effect is not to be executed, and the low-probability game state is set. The fluctuation end suggesting effect may be executed more easily in the high-probability gaming state. It should be noted that the variation end suggesting effect may be executed more easily in the low-probability gaming state than in the high-probability gaming state.
In the time-saving gaming state, the normal reach is not executed, and when the variation pattern is the non-reaching mode as the first display mode, the variation end suggesting effect is not executed, and the non-time-saving gaming state is performed. Also, the variable end suggesting performance may be executed more easily in the time saving game state. It should be noted that the variation end suggesting effect may be executed more easily in the non-time-saving gaming state than in the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, the type of variation end suggesting effect to be executed may be different between the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state. In addition, even if the type of variation end suggesting effect to be executed is the same in the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, the effect mode may be made different. For example, the color of the fusuma image FG may be changed between the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, or the color of the shining mode shown in FIG. 138(b) may be changed.

[Explanation of fluctuation pattern according to the number of reservations]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, the selection rate according to the number of the first special reservation and the number of the second special reservation will be described for the variation pattern combining the additional effects which are the various effects described above. . FIG. 145 is a diagram exemplifying a small hold fluctuation pattern table, which is a fluctuation pattern table when the number of holds is small (for example, when the number of holds is 1 to 2), and FIG. 146 shows when the number of holds is large (for example, , when the number of holds is 3 to 4) is a diagram exemplifying a multi-hold fluctuation pattern table. As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, each of the low-suspension variation pattern table and the high-suspension variation pattern table has the same variation pattern as the low-probability variation pattern table and the high-probability variation pattern table described above, and variation pattern 1A It has 15 variation patterns up to variation pattern 5C.

As shown in Figures 145 and 146, the less pending variation pattern table with a relatively large number of pending is less variation in the effect that is executed as an additional effect compared to the multiple pending variation pattern table with a relatively small number of pending. The pattern selectivity is high. That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of reservations is large, in order to promote the digestion of the reservations, it is easy to select a variation pattern that shortens the execution time of the variation effect for the reservation, and when the number of reservations is small , in order to prevent the player from losing the interest of the player due to the suspension being completely consumed and the execution of the variable performance being interrupted, a variation pattern that increases the execution time of the variable performance with respect to the suspension is set to be easily selected. There will be In addition, regarding the time when all the performance symbol rows of the performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed and the performance symbols become recognizable, the multi-suspension variation pattern table executes the variation end suggesting effect more than the low-suspension variation pattern table. This increases the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern. That is, although the special effect symbol TZ is being variably displayed, the time during which all the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and the effect symbol can be recognized is set to be longer as the number of reservations increases. It means that

[Description of fluctuation production in power failure recovery process]
Here, in the power failure recovery process when recovering from the power failure in the game machine 1, at E250 in FIG. The power recovery screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and the power recovery sound is output from the audio output device 9. However, after the power recovery screen is displayed, It is also possible to set the variable production to a predetermined mode. Specifically, for example, in the variation pattern that is the non-reach-losing display mode or the reach-losing display mode in the second display mode, when the effect symbol row and the special effect symbol TZ are fluctuating and recovering from the power interruption, the first image display After the power recovery screen is displayed on the device 70, it is always stopped and displayed with a performance pattern such as "515", which is a specific variation pattern, and the time for executing the additional performance is also specified as a specific additional performance (for example, Only the fluctuation end suggesting effect shown in FIG. 131) may be executed. In addition, the specific aspect of the variable display and stop display of the performance symbols when recovering from the power interruption while the performance symbol row and the special performance symbols TZ are fluctuating is in either case of low probability or high probability. It may be applied regardless of the number of reservations.

[Features of the fourth embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, the variation patterns 1A to 1C that are stop-displayed in a non-ready-to-lose suggesting mode different from the jackpot suggesting mode while the effect patterns of all the effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a in the second display mode are different from each other, In the second display mode, at least two of the performance symbols of the three performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are common and are stop-displayed in a reach-losing suggesting mode different from the jackpot suggesting mode, and , It is possible to change the time during which all the performance symbols of the performance symbols 70a can be recognized even though the special performance symbols TZ are being variably displayed. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the variation patterns 1A to 1C is the combination of the display time of FIG. ~1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect patterns of the variation patterns 2A to 3C are the display time of FIG. 128 (c) in the battle effect or revival effect, the display time of FIG. It is a combination of performance execution times, and is 1.5 to 5.5 seconds. Further, in the variation patterns 1A to 1C and the variation patterns 2A to 3C, as described above, the aspect of the variation end suggesting effect is made different, and all of the effect symbols 70a while the special effect symbol TZ is being variably displayed are displayed. It is also possible to make the aspect of the performance in the performance pattern different during the time when the performance pattern is recognizable. In this embodiment, the recognizable time of all the production patterns of the production pattern 70a differs between the case of non-reach and the case of reach in the first display mode, and the production during the time is different. Since the modes are different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big win from being spoiled until the second display mode indicating the result of the big win or not, and to improve the interest.

According to this embodiment, the variation patterns 2A to 2C, which are normal reach as the first display mode in a state in which at least one effect pattern row of the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner and the effect pattern cannot be visually recognized, and the effect pattern 70a In the variation patterns 3A to 3C in which the SP ready-to-win performance is executed as the first display mode in a state where at least one performance symbol row is variably displayed and the performance symbols cannot be visually recognized, the special performance symbol TZ is being variably displayed. It is possible to make the time during which all the production patterns of the object production patterns 70a can be recognized different. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the variation patterns 2A to 2C is the combination of the display time of FIG. 0.5 to 2.5 seconds. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect patterns of the variation patterns 3A to 3C is the combination of the display time of FIG. 5.5 seconds. Further, in the variation patterns 2A to 2C and the variation patterns 3A to 3C, as described above, the aspect of the variation end suggesting effect is different, and all of the effect symbols 70a while the special effect symbol TZ is being variably displayed are displayed. It is also possible to make the aspect of the performance in the performance pattern different during the time when the performance pattern is recognizable. In the present embodiment, in the case of normal reach in the first display mode and in the case of executing the SP reach effect, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a is different, and during the time Since the modes of presentation are different, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their expectation for the big win until the second display mode indicating the result of the big win or not, and to improve the amusement.

According to this embodiment, variation patterns 2B and 2C in which at least one of a battle effect, a resurrection effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect, which are effects for gradually increasing the degree of expectation while the special effect symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, are executed. , 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C, and the variation patterns 2A and 4A in which neither the SP reach effect, the resurrection effect, or the pseudo continuous effect is executed while the special effect pattern TZ is displayed in a variable display, the special effect pattern It is possible to change the time during which all the performance symbols of the performance symbols 70a can be recognized even though the TZ is being variably displayed. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the variation patterns 2B, 2C, 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, and 5A to 5C are shown in FIG. 132 (d) or FIG. 128(c) and (e) in the battle effect, the display time in FIG. 134(e) in the resurrection effect, and the execution time of the variable end suggesting effect, which is 3.5 to 7. seconds. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the variation patterns 2A and 4A is 1.5 to 3 seconds, depending on whether or not the execution time of the variation end suggesting performance is included. In addition, the variation patterns 2B, 2C, 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C and the variation patterns 2A and 4A are different in the mode of the variation end suggestion effect as described above, and the special effect symbol TZ is changed. It is also possible to change the mode of the production pattern in the production pattern during the time when all the production patterns of the production pattern 70a can be recognized even though they are being displayed in a variable manner. In this embodiment, whether or not the SP reach effect, the resurrection effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed while the special effect symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner determines the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a. are different and the mode of presentation during the time is different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big win from being spoiled until the second display mode indicating the result of whether or not the big win is achieved, and the enjoyment is improved. can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, at least one of a resurrection effect and a pseudo-continuous effect in which a recognizable aspect of the special effect pattern TZ is executed multiple times during one fluctuation of the special effect pattern TZ while the special effect pattern TZ is being variably displayed. is executed, compared to the variation pattern in which at least neither of the resurrection effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed while the special effect symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIGS. The time during which all the performance symbols of the performance symbols 70a can be recognized is long while the special performance symbols TZ are being variably displayed, and the probability that the second display mode will be the big hit suggesting mode can be increased. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols in the variation pattern in which at least one of the revival effect and the pseudo-continuous effect and the variation end suggesting effect are executed is the display of FIG. 132(d) in the pseudo-continuous effect 134(e) in the time or resurrection effect is combined with the execution time of the variable end suggestive effect, so at least one of the resurrection effect and the pseudo-continuous effect and the variable end suggestive effect are not executed. Compared to , it is longer by the execution time of the fluctuation end suggesting effect. In this embodiment, whether or not at least one of the resurrection effect and the pseudo-continuous effect and the fluctuation end suggesting effect is executed while the special effect symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner is determined by all effects of the effect symbol 70a. To impair a player's expectation for a big win when at least one of a resurrection performance and a pseudo-continuous performance and a variation end suggesting performance are executed, because the times when patterns are recognizable and the probability of winning a big win are different. can be prevented and interest can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect patterns of all the effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a are different from each other, and compared to the variation patterns 1A to 1C that are stop-displayed in a non-reach-losing suggesting mode different from the jackpot suggesting mode. Then, in the second display mode, at least two of the performance symbols of the three performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are common, and the fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C are stop-displayed in a reach-losing suggestive mode different from the jackpot suggestive mode. However, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, while the special effect pattern TZ is being displayed in a variable display, the time during which all the effect patterns of the effect pattern 70a can be recognized is long, and before the second display mode is entered. It is possible to increase the probability of executing at least one of a battle effect, a resurrection effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect for improving the degree of expectation. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the variation patterns 1A to 1C is the combination of the display time of FIG. ~1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect patterns of the variation patterns 2A to 3C are the display time of FIG. 128 (c) in the battle effect or revival effect, the display time of FIG. It is a combination of performance execution times, and is 1.5 to 5.5 seconds. In this embodiment, the recognizable time of all the production patterns of the production pattern 70a differs depending on whether the first display mode is non-reach or reach, and the battle production, resurrection production, Since the probability of executing at least one of the pseudo-continuous performances is different, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their expectation for the big win until the second display mode indicating whether or not the result of the big win is displayed. , can improve interest.

According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect patterns of all the effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a are different from each other, and compared to the variation patterns 1A to 1C that are stop-displayed in a non-reach-losing suggesting mode different from the jackpot suggesting mode. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the variation patterns 4A to 5C, which are the jackpot suggestive modes in the second display mode, are the ones in which the special performance symbol TZ is being variably displayed, but all the effects of the effect symbol 70a. The pattern can be recognized for a long time, and the probability of executing at least one of a battle performance, a resurrection performance, and a pseudo-continuous performance for improving the degree of expectation before the second display mode is established can be increased. . Specifically, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the variation patterns 1A to 1C is the combination of the display time of FIG. ~1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the production patterns of the variation patterns 4A to 5C is the display time of FIG. 128 (e) in the battle production, the display time of FIG. It is a combination of the display time of e) and the execution time of the effect suggesting the end of fluctuation, which is 3 to 7 seconds. In this embodiment, the recognizable time of all the production patterns of the production pattern 70a differs between the case of non-reach loss and the case of a big hit in the second display mode, and the battle production, resurrection production, Since the probability of executing at least one of the pseudo-continuous performances is different, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their expectation for the big win until the second display mode indicating whether or not the result of the big win is displayed. , can improve interest.

According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect patterns of all the effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a are different from each other, and compared to the variation patterns 1A to 1C that are stop-displayed in a non-reach-losing suggesting mode different from the jackpot suggesting mode. Then, in the second display mode, at least two of the performance symbols of the three performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are common, and the fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C are stop-displayed in a reach-losing suggestive mode different from the jackpot suggestive mode. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, it is possible to increase the probability of executing various end-of-variation suggestion effects. According to this embodiment, the probability of executing the variation end suggesting effect is different between the case of non-reach loss and the case of reach loss in the second display mode, so that the result of whether or not it is a big win is suggested. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big win from being spoiled until the second display mode, and to improve the interest.

According to the present embodiment, the production pattern 70a in the second display mode is a big hit in the second display mode as compared with the variation patterns 1A to 3C that are stop-displayed in a non-reach-loss suggestion mode or a reach-loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the variation patterns 4A to 5C, which are suggested modes, can be made to have a higher probability of executing various variation end suggestion effects. According to this embodiment, the probability of executing the variation end suggestion effect differs between the case of the second display mode in the losing suggestion mode and the case of the big win suggestion mode, so the result of whether or not the big win is determined. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big win from being spoiled until the suggested second display mode is reached, and to improve the amusement.

According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect patterns of all the effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a are different from each other, and compared to the variation patterns 1A to 1C that are stop-displayed in a non-reach-losing suggesting mode different from the jackpot suggesting mode. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the variation patterns 4A to 5C, which are the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, have a higher probability of executing various variation end suggestion effects. It is possible to make the probability of execution of various fluctuation end suggesting performances lower in the case of the non-reach-losing suggesting mode than in the case of the big win suggesting mode in the display mode. According to this embodiment, the probability of executing the fluctuation end suggesting effect is different between the non-reach losing suggesting mode and the big win suggesting mode in the second display mode, so the result of whether or not it is a big win. It is possible to prevent the player from spoiling the player's expectation for the big win until the second display mode is suggested, and to improve the amusement.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, it is possible to execute the variable end suggesting effect in different manners in the high-probability gaming state and in the low-probability gaming state. can. That is, in the high-probability gaming state and in the low-probability gaming state, the aspect of the fluctuation end suggesting effect is made different, so that all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a are displayed while the special effect symbol TZ is being variably displayed. It is also possible to change the mode of production in the production pattern during the recognizable time. In this embodiment, since the aspect of the fluctuation end suggestion effect differs between the high probability game state and the low probability game state, the player can determine whether the current game state is high probability or low probability. It is easy to discriminate whether or not it is, and the game can be played without spoiling the interest of the game.

Note that, in the present embodiment, an icon change effect for the pending icon may be further combined. For example, the icon change effect may be executed while the first display modes of normal reach effect, battle effect, resurrection effect, and pseudo-continuous effect are being displayed. Further, it may be set such that the possibility that the second display mode will be the big win suggestion mode changes depending on whether or not the icon change effect is executed. For example, the icon change effect is executed. It may be set such that when the game is executed, there is a high possibility of the big win suggestion mode compared to when it is not executed. Furthermore, such an icon change effect can be said to be a effect that improves the degree of expectation that the big win suggestion mode will be performed before the second display mode. Since the icon change effect can be executed to change stepwise in a plurality of modes, it can be said that it is a effect that gradually increases the degree of expectation. In the case of changing to , it can be said that it is an effect that the recognizable state of the effect pattern is executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation of the special effect pattern TZ.

(Fifth embodiment)
A fifth embodiment, which is an example of embodiments of the present invention, will be described below with reference to FIGS. 147 to 162. FIG. First, the gaming machine 1P (pachinko machine) will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 155. FIG.

In the following description, one side of the game board unit 12P shown in FIG. 147 and the direction toward the inner side of the island installed in the game hall is the rearward direction of the game machine 1P. The other side of the game board unit 12P facing the player is defined as the front direction of the game machine 1P. Also, the right, left, up, and down directions in the rear view of the game board unit 12P shown in FIG. 148 are the right, left, up, and down directions of the gaming machine 1P, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 147, the gaming machine 1P of this embodiment includes an outer frame 10, a game board unit 12P, and an inner frame 14P. The outer frame 10 is directly attached to an island installed in the game hall. The outer frame 10 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is longer in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction. The game board unit 12P and the inner frame 14P are rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 10 near one vertical side of the outer frame 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 147 to 149, the game board unit 12P mainly includes a base frame 221, a game board 222, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board (not shown), and a rear cover 124. there is

The game board unit 12P is rotatably attached to the outer frame 10 by rotatably attaching the base frame body 221 to the outer frame 10 . The game board unit 12P is configured by assembling a game board 222, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a rear cover 124, and the like to a base frame 221. As shown in FIG.

Specifically, the game board 222 is attached to the front side of the base frame 221 , and the image display device 123 , the lamp relay board, the rear cover 124 and the like are assembled to the rear side of the base frame 221 .

An opening (not shown) is formed in the base frame 221 and the game board 222 so that a liquid crystal screen (not shown) of the image display device 123 can be seen from the front when the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side. ing.

The game board 222 is formed with a game area in which game balls flow down. The game board 222 is attached to the base frame 221 so that the game area faces the surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side of the base frame 221. As shown in FIGS. The image display device 123 is arranged so as to close the opening of the base frame 221 . Also, the lamp relay board is attached to the rear side of the base frame 221 . The rear cover 124 partially covers the rear surface of the image display unit including the image display device 123 and the lamp relay board.

An assembly 2P, which will be described later, is attached to the rear side of the game board unit 12P. The assembly 2P is attached to the base frame 221 below the portion where the image display unit is covered with the back cover 124. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 147, the inner frame 14P is formed with a fitting space 241 into which the glass plate is fitted. Therefore, when the game machine 1P is assembled, the game area set on the game board of the game board unit 12P can be seen from the front through the glass plate fitted in the fitting space 241. - 特許庁An operation handle 142, an illumination lamp 143, and the like are provided on the front side of the inner frame 14P.

The assembly 2P will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 149-151, the assembly 2P includes a pedestal 20P, a substrate case 3P, and a protective cover 23. As shown in FIGS. The pedestal 20P is a component used to attach the board case 3P to the rear side of the game board unit 12P (see FIG. 149). As shown in FIG. 151, the pedestal 20P is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the horizontal direction are longer than two sides along the vertical direction. , and a plate-like hook 22 is provided in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 21P coincides with the left-right direction.

The substrate case 3P is provided with a pair of hook portions 49P that are engaged with the shaft portions 21P. A pair of hook portions 49P are provided on the lower side of an outer case 45P, which will be described later. The hook portion 49P is formed in a U shape that protrudes toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 152, when attaching the board case 3P to the pedestal 20P, the board case 3P is arranged so that the hook portion 49P protrudes toward the rear side. Then, the hook portions 49P are brought into a state in which they can be engaged with the shaft portions 21P, so that the substrate case 3P is brought closer to the pedestal 20P to engage the respective hook portions 49P with the respective shaft portions 21P.

Then, when the hook portion 49P is engaged with the shaft portion 21P, the substrate case 3P is rotated about the shaft portion 21P in a counterclockwise direction in a left side view (in the direction of the arrow of symbol C in FIG. 152), thereby rotating the substrate case 3P. is superimposed on the pedestal 20P. As shown in FIG. 150, at this time, the plate-shaped hook 22 provided on the upper side of the base 20P is hooked on the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the substrate case 3P. Therefore, the substrate case 3P is fixed to the pedestal 20P by the engagement between the hook portion 49P and the shaft portion 21P and the engagement between the plate-like hook 22 and the substrate case 3P.

As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the protective cover 23 is then attached to the substrate case 3P. The protective cover 23 covers the lower portion of the substrate case 3P including the hook portion 49P. Thus, the assembly 2P is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board unit 12P.

The control board 501 and the board case 3P will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, a control board 501 for controlling games is housed in the board case 3P. A ROM 502 is mounted on the control board 501 . A plurality of electronic components 595 different from the ROM 502 are mounted on the control board 501 . The plurality of electronic components 595 includes various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. In addition, as shown in FIG. 153(b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the control board 501. FIG. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 153(b) and may be omitted in other figures.

The ROM 502 stores memory contents (data) used for game control. In addition, the ROM 502 stores memory contents (data) that affect game results. A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right on the lower portion of the control board 501 . A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower portion of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 3P.

A plurality of connectors 774 and 775 among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775, respectively. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 receive signals from at least some of the general winning opening detection switch, the first starting opening detecting switch, the second starting opening detecting switch, and the large winning opening detecting switch for detecting that the game ball has won. signal is input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a general winning opening detection switch, a first starting opening detection switch, a second starting opening detection switch, and a large winning opening detection switch for detecting that a game ball has won. is input. The detection signal connectors 774,775 are a different color than the other connectors 771,772,773,776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different from fluorescent.

The ROM 502 includes a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582 . A first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits a signal between the ROM 502 and the control board 501 . The first signal pin 582 is arranged so as to be visible through the substrate case 3P. Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the body portion 580 of the ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the control board 501 . Therefore, the first signal pin 582 can be visually recognized from the front through the substrate case 3P.

A signal pin provided for each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is called a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 151). The second signal pin 583 transmits signals between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the control board 501 . A signal is not limited to a digital signal, and includes an analog signal. It is arranged so as to be visible through the substrate case 3P. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, leftward, rightward or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected with the control board 501 . Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the board case 3P.

As shown in FIG. 151, the substrate case 3P is a box-shaped case that accommodates the control substrate 501 and the ROM 502 in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. Further, the board case 3P encloses the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 153(b)) mounted on the control board 501 can be visually recognized. The board case 3P is made of a material having light transmission properties such as transparent plastic.

The board case 3P includes a plurality of members 511 containing the control board 501 and a cutting member 6P for cutting the sealing seal 7P. The multiple members 511 include an inner case 40P, an outer case 45P, and a cap 8P. The inner case 40P is combined with the outer case 45P to form an inner package portion 581 that includes the control board 501 therein. The outer case 45P is provided on the rear side, which is the ROM 502 side, of the substrate case 3P. The inner case 40P is provided on the front side opposite to the ROM 502 side in the substrate case 3P. In FIG. 150(c), only the ROM 502 is shown among the electrical components provided on the control board 501 contained in the transparent board case 3P, and other electrical components are omitted. (The same applies to FIG. 155(a), etc.).

As shown in FIG. 154, each of the cases 40P and 45P includes control board housing portions 41P and 46P for housing a control board 501 (see FIG. 151) and a sealing base portion 5P (see FIG. 155) which will be described later. Stop portions 51P and 56 are provided. The control board housing portions 41P and 46P are provided with substantially rectangular plate portions 42P and 47P and projecting from the peripheral edge portions of these plate portions 42P and 47P, and one side surfaces of the plate portions 42P and 47P are provided. It is formed in a shape having surrounding flange portions 43P and 48P.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151, a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the control board 501 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 42P of the inner case 40P. A hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 . A thread is formed inside the hole 566 . A hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565 in the control board 501 .

The control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40P. More specifically, the hole 567 of the control board 501 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the inner case 40P. A shaft portion of a screw 769 (see FIG. 153) is inserted from the rear side of the control board 501 into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 via the hole portion 567 . The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 153(b)). As a result, the control board 501 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40P. That is, the control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40P side.

As shown in FIG. 154, of the flange portion 43P of the control board housing portion 41P, the portion protruding from the plate portion 42P along two long sides of the plate portion 42P (hereinafter referred to as "male portion") is are formed with three L-shaped hooking grooves 430, respectively.

On the other hand, of the flange portion 48P of the control board housing portion 46P, the portion that protrudes from the plate portion 47P along two long sides of the plate portion 47P (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 480 into which the male portion of the control board housing portion 41P can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 481 is formed in each insertion groove portion 480 .

When the inner case 40P to which the control board 501 is screwed with the screws 769 and the outer case 45P are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 43P is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 48P. Then, the control board housing portions 41P and 46P are slid relative to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 154 along the left-right direction. Then, the hooking groove 430 provided in the male portion is engaged with the hooking piece 481, so that the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

When combined in this manner, the control board storage portions 41P and 46P form a box-shaped inner envelope portion 581 inside which is shielded from the outside. The control board 501 (see FIG. 151) is accommodated in the encapsulating portion 581 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the like are illegally replaced.

The control board 501 is attached inside the control board housing portion 46P before the control board housing portions 41P and 46P are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the control board 501 is attached so as to face the plate portion 47P of the control board housing portion 46P. This is because the plate portion 47P is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the control board 501 is accommodated in the board case 3P, the electronic components such as the ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501 cannot be illegally replaced. This is so that it can be checked from the outside through the plate portion 47P. As shown in FIG. 148, in this embodiment, when the assembly 2P having the board case 3P is attached to the game board unit 12P, the control board 501 in the board case 3P is connected from the back side of the game machine 1P through the outer case 45P. Mounted electronic components can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 154, sealing portions 51P and 56 are provided at the right end portions of the respective cases 40P and 45P. As shown in FIG. 155, the cases 40P and 45P are provided with a first screwing piece 91 and a second screwing piece 96 above the sealing portions 51P and 56, respectively.

When the control board housing portions 41P and 46P are slid and combined, the sealing base portion 5P is formed by the sealing portions 51P and 56 at the longitudinal end portions of the sealing body 4P that is combined with them.

As shown in FIG. 153, when the cap 8P is attached to the sealing body 4P while covering the sealing base portion 5P, a first screw-stopping piece 91 and a second screw-stopping piece 91 are attached to the ends of the sealing body 4P in the longitudinal direction. In addition to the piece 96, a third screwing piece 98 provided on the cap 8P overlaps to form a screwing portion 9P for screwing.

As shown in FIG. 154, the sealing portions 51P and 56 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board housing portions 41P and 46P. The sealing portions 51P and 56 are formed to have the same height in the horizontal direction and the same width in the vertical direction.

Long groove portions 512 and 562 are formed in the respective sealing portions 51P and 56 along the left-right direction. Two parallel grooves 562 are formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 56 at a predetermined distance, and one groove 512 is formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 51P.

As shown in FIG. 155, when the cases 40P and 45P are combined as described above, the sealing portions 51P and 56 form the sealing base portion 5P on the right side of the combined control board storage portions 41P and 46P. do.

In the sealing base portion 5P, the sealing portions 51P and 56 are arranged in parallel with each other at a constant interval, and an inserting/removing space 5ap (see FIG. 155) is formed between the faces of the sealing portions 51P and 56 facing each other. be.

As shown in FIG. 154, the sealing seal 7P is used as means for sealing the board case 3P, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having authentication qualifications.

The sealing seal 7P is made of a material such as paper which is easy to cut in consideration of cuttability, and an adhesive surface is provided on one side of the material, and a plurality of cuts are formed. Although not shown, the sealing seal 7P is printed with, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like. The seal 7P is also printed with the words "Do not open".

The cutting member 6P is formed in a shape having a base portion 60P, a pair of knob portions 61P, and a cutting portion 64P. A base portion 60P serving as the base of the cutting member 6P is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64P is formed on one of two long sides of the base portion 60P. The cutting portion 64P is a portion formed into a blade shape at the tip of the base portion 60P. The knob portions 61P are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base portion 60P, and are formed in a shape that is bent as a whole. A left end portion of the pick portion 61P is referred to as a free end portion 61a.

The cap 8P is formed in a size that can cover the entire sealing base portion 5P by covering the sealing base portion 5P, and is detachably formed with respect to the sealing base portion 5P.

The cap 8P includes a bowl-shaped box portion 80 that covers the sealing base portion 5P, and a third screw stop piece 98 formed at one end of the box portion 80 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 82 is formed on the inner surface of the box portion 80 at a position where the free end portion 61a of the knob portion 61P of the cutting member 6P inserted into the insertion/removal space 5ap is caught when the cap 8P is attached to the sealing base portion 5P. is provided. A groove portion 86 is formed on the inner surface of the box portion 80 .

The cutting member 6P is inserted into the insertion/removal space 5ap (see FIG. 155) of the sealing base portion 5P. After that, the sealing seal 7P is attached. Furthermore, when the cap 8P is put on the sealing base portion 5P, the groove portion 86 fits into a portion of the cutting member 6P inserted into the insertion/removal space 5ap. Also, the projection 82 engages with the free end portion 61a of the knob portion 61P of the cutting member 6P.

As shown in FIG. 153, when the cap 8P is placed over the sealing base portion 5P as described above, the third screw-stopping piece 98 engages the first screw-stopping piece 91 of the inner case 40P and the second screw-stopping piece 91 of the outer case 45P. The screw-stopping piece 96 is overlapped with the combination to form a screw-stopping portion 9P for screwing. When the crimping member 30P is driven into the screwing portion 9P, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P and the cap 8P are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the substrate case 3P, the caulking member 30P is removed and the cap 8P is removed from the sealing base portion 5P. The same applies when the board case 3P is illegally unsealed.

The cutting member 6P and the cap 8P are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 8P is removed from the sealing base portion 5P, the cutting member 6P is also removed from the sealing base portion 5P at the same time. Then, the sealing seal 7P is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 64P or the like.

The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, identification marks 520 are attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P, and the cap 8P. The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1P. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the control board 501 is referred to as identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the ROM 502 is referred to as identification display 522. FIG. The identification display 520 provided on the outer case 45P is referred to as identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the inner case 40P is referred to as identification display 524. As shown in FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 8P is called an identification mark 525. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 151, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper back surface of the control board 501 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification 522 is attached to ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the substrate case 3P are information identification portions for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the inner case 40P by imprinting with a mold for manufacturing the inner case 40P (see FIG. 155). The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 8P by imprinting with a mold for manufacturing the cap 8P. The display mode of the identification display 523 and the relationship with the information identification section will be described later.

Identifying indicia 521-525 are related to each other and include at least identifying indicia 529 suggesting the same content. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". An identification 529 suggesting the same contents as the identifications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, and the like. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name and "CD" represents the model name.

In the identification displays 521 to 525, the manufacturer name is not displayed as "AB" included in "ABCD", but the manufacturer name itself is displayed like "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. You may Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed like "CR Aiu" in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. Further, the identification indications 521 to 525 may indicate the model, such as the identification indications 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In this case, the identification indications suggesting the same contents among the identification indications 521 to 525 are the model name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

In the following description, a surface of the outer case 45P that forms the inside of the substrate case 3P is referred to as an inner surface 532. As shown in FIG. A surface of the outer case 45P that forms the outside of the board case 3P is called an outer surface 531. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 150(c), 153(c), and 155, the outer surface 531 is provided with a position display portion 541. As shown in FIGS. The position display portion 541 is a portion that displays the position to which the identification display 523 is provided. The position display portion 541 is provided at a portion different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502 in the substrate case 3P. More specifically, the position display portion 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the outer case 45P. The ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a concave portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 153(b), the position display portion 541 is attached with a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmissive material. In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example. A printed portion 797 is printed on the seal portion 542 . In this embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is the identification display 523 . Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542 , the identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 . The seal portion 542 is arranged across at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the substrate case 3P. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the substrate case 3P when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 153(b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and actually other electronic components (see FIG. 151) are also present. The identification display 523 of the outer case 45P is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45P does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 . As with the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 162) in the modified example to be described later, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the ROM 502 when the board case 3P is at a predetermined angle.

In this way, when a sticker or the like with an identification mark attached by printing or the like is affixed to an object so that the identification mark is attached to the object, the seal portion or the like including the identification mark is called an information identification portion. It is assumed that In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 including the identification display 523 is the information identification portion. Note that the identification marks 520 are attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P, and the cap 8P, but not one to each, but two or more. Sometimes. For example, the ROM 502 may have two identification marks, and similarly may have two information identification portions.

As described above, the gaming machine 1P in this embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a board case 3P that encloses the control board 501 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 150, 151, 153, and 155, the substrate case 3P is provided with a position display portion 541, which is a portion for displaying the position where the identification mark 523 is provided. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the substrate case 3P compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

In addition, when manufacturing the game machine 1P, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position where the identification display 520 is provided, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification mark 523 is given by the manufacturer, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the identification mark 523 is given at different positions among the plurality of gaming machines 1P. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the substrate case 3P compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the position display portion 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3P and is a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520. As shown in FIG. Since the position display portion 541 which is a concave portion is provided, the inspector can grasp the position of the position display portion 541, for example, compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the plane of the substrate case 3P. easy to do Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the substrate case 3P. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the concave position mark portion 541 . Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the gaming machines 1P, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the position display portion 541 is provided at a portion different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502 in the substrate case 3P. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display section 541 and the ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily discovered that the ROM 502 has been replaced by an illegal act. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the position display portion 541 is a concave portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3P for positioning the identification display 520 (523). Since the position display portion 541, which is a concave portion, is provided, it is possible to prevent peeling of the seal when the seal portion 542 is affixed to the flat surface of the substrate case 3P, for example, when it is touched by a hand. can. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display portion 541, since the seal portion is protected, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3P. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the seal portion 542 including the identification indication 523, which is the information identification portion attached to the substrate case 3P, and the identification indication 522, which is the information identification portion attached to the ROM 502, are identification indications suggesting at least the same content. 529. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Further, in the present embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45P does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 . The identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45P is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. You can easily check and confirm that no fraudulent activity is taking place. Further, even if the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM by fraudulent act, the inspector can determine whether the ROM 502 and the identification mark 529 attached to the board case 3P are the same. It is easy to confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, a seal portion 542 including an identification display 523 attached to the board case 3P, an identification display 522 attached to the ROM 502, and an information identification displayed on the control board 501. The identification indication 521, which is the part, includes at least an identification indication 529 (character string "ABCD" in this embodiment) suggesting the same content. Therefore, the inspector can easily check that the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3P with the identification marks 529 suggesting the same contents are attached, and that no fraudulent act has been carried out. Further, even if at least one of the control board 501 and the ROM 502 is replaced with another control board 501 and the ROM 502 by fraud, the identification marks 529 attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3P are the same. By judging whether or not there is, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The board case 3P encloses the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776, for example. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Moreover, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, they are easier for the inspector to visually recognize than when they are not fluorescent. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 for fraud. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

A plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 than when there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 for fraud. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

A first signal pin 582 provided in the ROM 502 is arranged so as to be visible through the substrate case 3P. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the first signal pin 582 tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Also, the second signal pins 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3P. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device other than the control board 501 is connected to the second signal pin 583 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40P side with screws 769 (see FIG. 153(b)). Therefore, the control board 501 is less likely to be illegally replaced than when it is not screwed. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P are slidably combined with each other. Therefore, even if a person who tries to commit fraud simply tries to separate the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P in order to separate the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P are separated. hard to be Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the control board 501 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications are possible. In each modified example below, the same reference numerals are used to denote the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although the position display portion 541 is a concave portion, it is not limited to this. For example, the position display portion 541 may be a convex portion. FIG. 156 shows an arrow-direction cross-section at the position of the AA line shown in FIG. 153 in the outer case 45P of the board case 1003 according to the modification of the board case 3P. As shown in FIG. 156, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1003 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the outer case 45P and protrudes rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 .

Further, although the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position indicator 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 . FIG. 157 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 153 in the outer case 45P of the board case 1103 according to the modification of the board case 3P. As shown in FIG. 157, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1103 is a concave portion formed in the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 1103 and recessed rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1103 through the transparent outer case 45P.

FIG. 158 shows an arrow-direction cross-section at the position of the AA line shown in FIG. 153 in the outer case 45P of the board case 1203 according to the modification of the board case 3P. As shown in FIG. 158, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1203 is a protrusion formed on the inner surface 532 of the board case 1203 and protrudes forward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1203 through the transparent outer case 45P.

As described above, the position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3P and is a projection or recess for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display portion 541, which is a convex portion or a concave portion, is provided, the inspector can easily determine the position of the identification display 520 compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the plane of the substrate case 3P. , easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 520 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the position mark portion 541, which is a projection or a recess. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the gaming machines 1P, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the plurality of members 511 that enclose the control board 501 may not include some of the outer case 45P, the inner case 40P, and the cap 8P. Also, the plurality of members 511 may further include members different from the outer case 45P, the inner case 40P, and the cap 8P.

Further, although the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the plurality of members 511 are provided with the identification marks 520, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 may be provided with associated identifications 520 . For example, the identification mark 525 may not be attached to the cap 8P included in the plurality of members 511. FIG. Further, the inner case 40P included in the plurality of members 511 may not have the identification mark 524 attached. Further, the identification mark 523 may not be attached to the outer case 45P included in the plurality of members 511. FIG. An inspector can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed by checking the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 . For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced with another control board due to fraud, it is possible to determine whether or not the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 are related. By judging whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P. In this case, the inspector confirms the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P, and easily confirms whether or not fraud has been committed. can be done. For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced by another control board due to fraud, the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P are related. By judging whether or not there is a fraudulent act, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least the outer case 45P and the ROM 502 . In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the identification display 520 attached to the outer case 45P and the ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been committed. For example, even if the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM by fraudulent activity, the inspector can easily determine whether or not at least the outer case 45P and the identification mark 520 attached to the ROM 502 are related. You can confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification marks 520 may be related to each other. For example, the identification indications 520 may all be the same identification indication (for example, all "ABCD01" etc.). Further, the identification indications 520 may be different indications, and the same identification indications 529 may not be included. The content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Also, the identification display 520 may not be a character string. For example, identifying indicia 520 may be various markings. Also, the manner in which the identification mark 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification mark 521 but all of the identification marks 521 to 525 may be printed and added to the seal portion. Also, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Further, all of the identification marks 523 to 525 may be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the substrate case 3P.

Further, the identification mark 520 may be formed inside the material of the substrate case 3P. The modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160. FIG. A board case 1303 shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is a modification of the board case 3P. A portion of the substrate case 1303 where the identification display 523 is displayed is called an identification display portion 1390 . Also, a portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outer portion 1391 . As shown in FIG. 160, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391 . Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 .

The identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display portion 1390 (the material of the outer case 45P in this embodiment). The identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of (four in this embodiment) layers 1381 , 1382 , 1383 , and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display portion 1390 .

Character 1371 of “A” of identification display 523 is formed in hierarchy 1381 . The letter “B” 1372 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . The letter “C” 1373 is formed in hierarchy 1383 . The letter “D” 1374 is formed in hierarchy 1384 . A “0” character 1375 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . Character 1376 of “3” is formed in hierarchy 1383 .

The method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 is not limited. Identification 523 may be formed, for example, by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technique of condensing a laser beam and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm inside the material of the substrate case 3P. By forming a plurality of cracks, an identification mark 523 is formed inside the substrate case 3P.

In this embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 . Therefore, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than, for example, when the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced. Also, if the identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, the circuit board case 1303 is scratched. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 and provided. Therefore, the identification display 523 is less likely to be removed than when the identification display 523 is formed on only one layer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, in the substrate case 1303 , the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 . In this case, compared to the case where L1 is less than or equal to L2, it is necessary to grind the substrate case 3P deeper when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification mark 520. FIG. Therefore, the substrate case 1303 is easily damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

It should be noted that the identification display 523 may not be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 . For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be less than or equal to the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 . Further, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification displays 524, 525, etc., provided on the substrate case 1303 may be formed inside the substrate case 1303 in the same manner.

In the above embodiments, the substrate case 1303 is an example of the "case portion" of the present invention.

Also, various seals other than the seal portion 542 and the like may be attached to the board case 3P. In addition, the contents displayed on the printed portion (for example, the printed portion 797) provided on various stickers such as the sticker portion 542 are not limited. For example, a board case 1551 according to the modification shown in FIG. In FIG. 161, members having the same configuration as in the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The seal portion 1560 is affixed to the upper portion of the laterally central portion of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1551 . The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 3P. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 151). In FIG. 161, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 151) positioned in front of seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560 . The printing section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575 . The printing portion 1571 is colored, and has a white background as an example in this embodiment. Plurality of areas 1575 includes code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and description area 1570 . Seal portion 1560 is provided so that print portion 1571 , code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and writing area 1570 do not overlap ROM 502 .

Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1P (hereinafter referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the control board 501 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1P was delivered), whether the game machine 1P has been discarded, and the like. contains information on This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1P has been discarded.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the control board 501 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1P and whether or not the gaming machine 1P has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

As an example, the description areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. Above the upper left writing area 1570, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the upper right description area 1570, "Date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the description area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .

For example, when the inspector opens the board case 3P, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the writing area 1570 on the left side, and writes the date of opening the board case 3P in the writing area 1570 on the right side. Note that the inspector may write in the writing area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the control board 501 was tampered with.

Seal portion 1560 includes viewing portion 1574 for viewing electronic component 798 . Peeping portions 1574 are provided between a plurality of regions 1575 . The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a peeping portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided between the writing regions 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction. Between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged horizontally and the two writing regions 1570 on the upper side, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the writing regions 1570 in two columns in the horizontal direction.

Also, the seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of the model name, type, and manufacturer name is printed. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502 . The seal portion 1562 is pasted on the left side of the identification display 522 “ABCD02” of the ROM 502 . Seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of the model name, type, and manufacturer name is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU”, the model “GH101”, and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1596 is the model name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company". Note that the identification display 522 of the ROM 502 is also an information identification section, that is, in this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two information identification sections.

Moreover, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including identification indications 1595 and 1596 suggesting at least the same contents. In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification indications 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but some of them may be the same.

Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the substrate case 3P and the ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, on the control board 501, identification signs 1595, 159
6 may be displayed including the same identification.

As described above, the substrate case 1551, the control substrate 501, and the like according to this modification are formed. In this embodiment, since the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 are arranged across at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 151), the seal portions 542, 1560, for example,
, 1561 and the electronic component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the control board 501 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

In addition, since an area 1575 is provided, the inspector can write the name of the inspector and the date when the board case 3P is opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the description area 1570). can. In addition, the inspector can write in area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the control board 501 was tampered with. Also, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Moreover, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 798 through the viewing portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 798 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the peeping portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1P. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the control board 501 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. FIG. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the ROM 502 is illegally replaced by checking the seal portion 1562 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

In addition, since at least one of the model name, type, and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name. can be done. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name, type, and manufacturer name, and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Note that the shape of the ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 153, the ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected with the control board 501 . Further, when the body portion 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the top surface or the bottom surface of the body portion 580 .

Various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed at an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. For example, FIG. 162 is a diagram of the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 viewed obliquely from above. In FIG. 162, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the ROM 502 . That is, FIG. 162 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle at which it is difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the ROM 502 . However, as shown in FIG. 161, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 161 shows the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, the various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, the information of the identification display 523) is displayed at an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. I wish I could.

(Sixth embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 168, a sixth embodiment, which is an example of embodiments of the present invention, will be described. In addition, in the sixth embodiment described below, the same reference numerals as in the fifth embodiment are used for the same configurations as in the fifth embodiment, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166, an overview of the configuration of the board case 1700 and the control board 1705 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a rear view of the board case 1700 in which the control board 1705 according to the fifth embodiment is housed. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the seal portion 1710, and FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the date mark portion 1720. FIG. FIG. 165(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the unsealable seal portion 1730, and FIG. 165(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the unsealable seal portion 1730 is affixed to the substrate case 1700. FIG. . FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display configuration of the information display 1750. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 163, the gaming machine 1P of the sixth embodiment includes a control board 1705 and a board case 1700 that houses the control board 1705. As shown in FIG. The substrate case 1700 has substantially the same configuration as the substrate case 1551 which is a modification of the fourth embodiment, but includes a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an unsealing prohibition seal 1730, and a RAM clear operation portion 1785, which will be described later. ing. The control board 1705 has substantially the same configuration as the control board 501, which is a modification of the fourth embodiment, but includes an information display 1750, an operation key section 1780, and a RAM clear button, which will be described later.

The seal portion 1710 is made of a light-transmissive material, and is attached to the upper portion of the laterally central portion of the outer case 45</b>P of the substrate case 1700 . Note that the seal portions 1710 are arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) and the like. The date mark portion 1720 is formed at the lower portion of the center portion of the outer case 45P of the board case 1700 in the left-right direction so as to protrude from the outer case 45P on the front side of the outer case 45P. The unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 is affixed to a seal affixing portion 1701 formed on the right end portion of the substrate case 1700 in the left-right direction. Note that the seal sticking portion 1701 is a portion covered with the cap 8P. The RAM clear operation unit 1785 is formed at the lower right portion in the horizontal direction of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1700, and is configured to be able to operate the RAM clear button of the control substrate 1705. FIG. The operation key portion 1780 has a structure in which a specific key can be inserted and rotated. The insertion opening of the specific key is exposed from the outer case 45P of the board case 1700, so that the control board 1705 can be moved to the board case. 1700 so as to be operable. The operation key section 1780 is connected to the main CPU that controls the game of the gaming machine 1P so that a signal indicating whether or not the operation key section 1780 has been operated can be transmitted.

The information display 1750 is provided at the upper right corner of the control board 1705 in the horizontal direction, and is arranged inside the board case 1700 made of transparent resin covering the control board 501 . The information display 1750 is located at a position different from the positions where the main CPU, main ROM, and main RAM provided on the control board 501 are provided. It is provided at a position where visibility is not hindered by 1785, seal portion 1710, or the like. Further, none of the plurality of electronic components provided on the control board 1705 such as the electronic component 595 are provided around or near the information display 1750 . Such an information display 1750 is conspicuous even though it is provided on the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, so that the displayed information can be easily recognized visually.

Here, the information display 1750 and the out-ball detection switch (not shown) will be described. The out ball detection switch detects all game balls launched into the game area (referred to as "out balls" in this embodiment), and attaches the detection result data to the main control board 300 to the connection cable. connected. The information display 1750 displays various performances of the gaming machine 1P using numerical values calculated by the main CPU based on the detection result of the out-ball detection switch (values calculated by a calculation formula to be described later). be. Whether or not the numerical value displayed on the information display 1750 is within a predetermined range makes it possible to determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine 1P is being maintained.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), the seal portion 1710 has substantially the same configuration as the seal portion 1560, and includes a print portion 1711, a code portion 1712, an information display portion 1713, a writing area 1570, and a viewing portion 1574. there is By reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 with a predetermined terminal, the information displayed on the predetermined terminal includes the character string described in the information display portion 1713. . In other words, predetermined information including specific information is displayed in different forms, such as the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 . Here, the configurations of code portion 1712 and information display portion 1713 are different from those of code portion 1572 and information display portion 1573 of seal portion 1560 . Specifically, the character string “EF001” is printed across the colored area of the code portion 1712 and the colored area of the information display portion 1713 . With the seal portion 1710 having such a configuration, if either the colored region of the code portion 1712 or the colored region of the information display portion 1713 is scraped off to illegally change the information, the seal portion 1710 will not be as strong as the seal portion 1560 . Traces of changes are likely to be clarified, and unauthorized changes of information can be deterred. Further, as described above, the electronic component 798 provided at a position covered by the seal portion 1560 is visible from the peep portion 1574. This is because at least a part or the entirety of the electronic component 798 is attached to the control board. It means that it is possible not only to be visually recognizable through the viewing portion 1574 from a direction perpendicular to the control board, but also to be visible through the viewing portion 1574 from a direction that is not perpendicular to the control board but forms a predetermined angle. is. Specifically, an electronic component provided at a position covered by the seal portion 1560, which is difficult to see from the direction perpendicular to the control board 1705 due to the colored region 1575, is covered by the seal portion 1560. 1560 can be visually recognized through the viewing portion 1574 from a direction forming a predetermined angle instead of being perpendicular to it.

As shown in FIG. 164(b), the date mark portion 1720 is a portion for displaying the date when the substrate case 1700 was manufactured, and is composed of a date display portion 1721 and a year/month display portion 1726. As shown in FIG. The date display portion 1721 has a circular outer edge formed with scales from 1 to 31, and has a form in which the date of manufacture is indicated by an arrow extending from the center of the circle. The year/month display portion 1726 has a scale from 1 to 12 formed on the outer edge of the circle. The month is indicated by an arrow extending from the center of the circle, and the numbers formed at the center of the circle indicate the date of manufacture. It is in the form of showing the year. That is, the date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 164(b) indicates that the board case 1700 was manufactured on "December 1, 2014". Note that the date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 164(b) is when the outer case 45P is viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1P, and when the circuit board case 1700 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine 1P. will be shown in reverse (for example, see FIG. 163).

As shown in FIG. 165(a), the unsealable seal portion 1730 includes an information display portion 1731 on which a predetermined character string is printed, a code portion 1732 on which a QR code (registered trademark) or the like is printed, and a hologram that is difficult to forge. A hologram display portion 1735 is formed. By reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1732 with a predetermined terminal, the information displayed on the predetermined terminal includes the character string described in the information display portion 1731. good too. In other words, predetermined information including specific information may be displayed in different forms, such as a QR code (registered trademark) in code portion 1732 and a character string in information display portion 1731 .

As shown in FIG. 165(b), when the unsealable seal portion 1730 is attached to the seal attachment portion 1701, the inner case 1730 is attached across the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1700. It is attached so as to cover part of the boundary portion 1738 when 40P and outer case 45P are combined. That is, since it comes into contact with the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, when the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are disassembled, the unsealing prevention seal portion 1730 is broken. In other words, the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 is an identification display portion whose shape changes when the substrate case 1700 is disassembled, unlike the identification display portion such as the seal portion 1705 or the like to which various identification information is attached. Further, the information display portion 1731 and the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 are affixed to the rear side of the gaming machine 1P in the sticker affixing portion 1701 so that the entirety thereof can be visually recognized. Further, the information display portion 1731 and the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 are provided at positions that are one step lower in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 than the top surface of the substrate case 1700 in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700. be done. In other words, the seal portion 1710 and the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 in the substrate case 1700 are configured to have different distances from a virtual plane extending the control substrate 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the control substrate 1705 . ing.

As shown in FIG. 166, the information display 1750 includes a control section (not shown), four 7-segment display sections 1770a to 1770d arranged in a row, and a display section 1770a to 1770d formed at the lower right of each 7-segment display section. It is composed of four dot display portions 1775a to 1775d. Also, the information display 1750 displays the data from the main control board 300 so that the main control board 300 that has received the result detected by the out-ball detection switch 302a outputs the data measured based on the detection result. output is connected. Further, the information display 1750 is always lit when the gaming machine 1P is powered on. In the information display 1750, the two 7-segment display portions 1770a and 1770b and the two dot display portions 1775a and 1775b positioned on the left side when viewed from the front serve as an identification display portion 1780a, and the two 7-segment display portions 1780a positioned on the right side. The 7-segment display portions 1770c and 1770d and the two dot display portions 1775c and 1775d are assumed to be a ratio display portion 1780b. It is assumed that the four 7-segment display portions 1770a to 1770d and the four dot display portions 1775a to 1775d are connected by circuits.

[Description of Display Mode on Information Display 1750]
Next, specific display modes on information display 1750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. FIG. FIG. 167 is a table for explaining the contents and display format displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the performance display of the gaming machine 1P, and FIG. 168 shows the contents displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the setting display of the gaming machine 1P. and a table for explaining a display form.

As shown in FIG. 167, when the performance of the gaming machine 1P is displayed on the information display 1750, the numerical value calculated by the main control board 300 is displayed on the ratio display section 1780b. Specifically, when the game state is in a low-probability state in a predetermined interval from the first power-on (every time the total number of out-balls reaches 60000 after the total number of out-balls reaches 300 from the first power-on). The ratio between the number of balls paid out and the number of out balls when in a low probability state (for example, when it is not a time-saving game in a low probability state) is output. The number of balls) ÷ (the number of out balls in the low probability state) × 100”, and the value rounded to the first decimal place is output. In addition, when the numerical value to be output is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio display section. In addition, even when the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on again, the measurements made so far are taken over as long as the RAM is not abnormal.

Identification display portion 1780a displays identifiable information about the types of numerical values displayed in ratio display portion 1780b. Specifically, when the measured value of the current section at the present time is displayed, "bL." ” to “b3.” are displayed. It should be noted that the flashing cycle in FIG. 167 is 0.3 seconds on and 0.3 seconds off, and the timing of display switching from "bL." to "b3." do.

Here, the flow of measurement in the gaming machine 1P of this embodiment will be described. First, when the gaming machine 1P is powered on for the first time and a game is started, detection of a game ball discharged from an out ball discharge port in a low probability state is started by an out ball detection switch. Here, the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge port are from all the out ports in the game area, so the number of game balls based on the detection result of the out ball detection switch is the total number of out balls. After the total number of out balls reaches 300, a payout ball measurement switch (a switch for detecting the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, not shown) for each predetermined section in the low probability state and A calculated value calculated by the main CPU is output on the information display 1750 based on the detection result of the out-ball detection switch.

In addition, the game machine 1P can change the setting of the probability of a big win, and the setting of the probability of a big win can be changed by operating the setting key 1780 and the RAM clear button of the RAM clear operation section 1785. FIG. Specifically, when the game machine 1P is powered on and the RAM clear button is set to "ON" by the setting key unit 1780 "ON", the setting of the jackpot probability is changed according to the number of times the RAM clear button is pressed. The setting can be confirmed by turning the setting key portion 1780 to "OFF" when the setting is desired to be changed. Further, when the gaming machine 1P is powered on and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 "ON", the current jackpot probability setting of the gaming machine 1P is displayed on the information display 1750 as will be described later. , you can check the settings. When the game machine 1P is shipped, when the recovery information is damaged, or when a recovery error occurs due to turning on/off the power while changing the settings, etc., the power is ON and the setting key unit 1780 is set to "ON" in the same manner as described above. If the clear button is set to "ON", the setting can be changed, but if the power is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 "ON", the game will be stopped.

As shown in FIG. 168, specifically, in the gaming machine 1P of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to the first setting (low probability: 1/300) to the sixth setting (high probability: 1/250). It can be set in 6 steps. In this setting change and setting confirmation, in the 7-segment display portion 1770d located on the right side of the information display portion 1750, "1" to "6" are displayed according to the setting value to be changed or the setting value currently set. Lights up. Furthermore, when the setting is changed, all the 7-segment display portions 1770a to 1770d and the dot display portions 1775a to 1775d blink for five seconds after the end of the setting change. After blinking for 5 seconds, the performance of the gaming machine 1P is displayed on the identification display portion 1780a and the ratio display portion 1780b. In addition, when changing settings and checking settings, a voice indicating the current state such as "Settings are being changed" or "Settings are being checked" and a warning siren are output while the settings are being changed/checked. The LCD will display a message such as "Changing settings/Confirming settings". In addition, in such a gaming machine, regardless of the type of setting of the jackpot probability, the selection rate of a specific effect ("first effect" in FIG. 168) at the time of the big win, and the The selection rate of a specific production is assumed to be constant.

Here, the words and phrases used in the table of FIG. 168 will be explained. “(At the time of a jackpot/at the time of a loss” first effect selection rate” means that the “first effect” is selected (executed) in the effect executed when a “jackpot” or “loss” is determined. As described above, this "first effect selection rate" is constant regardless of the jackpot probability of each setting of the first setting to the sixth setting. The "first effect appearance rate" is the probability that the "first effect" will be executed in the effect executed based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device. The "first effect appearance rate" is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the "jackpot probability" in each setting by the "first effect selection rate".In addition, the "first effect appearance rate" when "losing" Is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the "probability of losing" in each setting by the "first effect selection rate". In the judgment based on the ball entering the ball, it is the probability that it will be judged as "losing", and it is a numerical value that can be calculated by subtracting the "jackpot probability" from "1". , In the effect selected (executed) along with the determination based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device in the case of the non-probability variable gaming state, it is the probability that the "first effect" is executed. The "total first effect appearance rate" is a numerical value that is the sum of the "first effect appearance rate at the time of a big win" and the "first effect appearance rate at the time of a loss" in each setting. Effect Reliability" refers to the executed ``first It is the probability that the "effect" is the "first effect" executed together with the determination of the "jackpot." It is a numerical value that can be calculated by dividing by

[Action and effect of the sixth embodiment]
In the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the seal portion 1720 is provided with the viewing portion 1574. Therefore, the inspector can inspect the substrate case through the viewing portion 1574. By visually checking the control board 1705 stored in 1700, it is possible to confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with compared to a game machine having a board case that is not provided with something like the peeping part 1574. , can lead to a reduction in the possibility of fraud. Further, in such a seal portion 1720, predetermined characters can be written in the writing region 1570, which is a plurality of colored regions. It is also easier for the inspector to check the contents of the information in letters, compared to stickers on which letters are written. Furthermore, in such a seal portion, transparent viewing portion 1574 is provided between description region 1570, code portion 1712, and information display portion 1713, which are a plurality of colored regions. The colored area is conspicuous compared to what is provided, and the inspector can easily confirm the characters and the like written in the writing area 1570 , the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 .

Further, according to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the date of opening and the date mark described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 Although the date of manufacture displayed in section 1720 is different information, it has a predetermined chronological relationship. Specifically, the date of opening described in description area 1570 of seal portion 1720 is always newer than the date of manufacture displayed in date mark portion 1720 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the consistency between the date of opening of the written area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date of manufacture of the date mark portion 1720, thereby avoiding fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. can be easily verified.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 as in the present embodiment, the information displayed in the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 is associated with the information displayed on the unsealable seal portion 1730 . Therefore, by confirming the consistency between the information on the seal portion 1720 and the information on the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the inspector can easily confirm fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. In addition, the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 has a distance from a virtual plane in which the control board 1705 is extended in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700. It is provided so as to be different from the distance to the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 . Therefore, the inspector can see that the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 are provided at the same height and on the same plane. The information in the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 are easily visible, and fraudulent actions such as unauthorized replacement of the control board can be easily confirmed.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are different in the thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390. Since the layers are formed in layers, the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed so as to have different distances from the top surface of the board case 1700 . Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, it is easier to remove than, for example, the case where the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification display 523 is provided at positions with different distances from the top surface in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700, that is, in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove than if there is. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed illegally, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700. Therefore, it is possible for the inspector to discover the illegal act. It can be said that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts as well as it is easy to do. Further, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap and are separated from each other in a plan view, the characters 1371 and 1372 appear to be different from each other when the assembly 2P is viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine. The character 1372 can be viewed from a bird's-eye view, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been fraudulent activity with respect to the control board 1705 or the like.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are arranged in the thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390. Since they are formed in different layers, the character 1371 of the layer 1381 and the character 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed on a predetermined surface of the control substrate 1705 (for example, in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the control substrate 1705). are formed to have different distances from the stretched imaginary plane). Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, it is easier to remove than, for example, the case where the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, the identification display 523 is provided at positions with different distances from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. It is relatively difficult to remove. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed illegally, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700. Therefore, it is possible for the inspector to detect illegal acts. It can be said that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts as well as it is easy to do. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap and are separated from each other in a plan view, the characters 1371 and 1372 appear to be different from each other when the assembly 2P is viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine. The character 1372 can be viewed from a bird's-eye view, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been fraudulent activity with respect to the control board 1705 or the like.

Further, in the case of a game machine 1P including an assembly 2P having a seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are Information that is linked to each other and contains the same specific information is displayed in different manners. Therefore, it is difficult to tamper with the code portion 1712, and even if the information in the information display portion 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can easily determine whether or not there has been fraud by checking the consistency with the code portion 1712. In addition, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts. Also, in the seal portion 1720, a peeping portion 1574 is formed between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 and the description area 1570, so that the control board 1705 can be tampered with in the same manner as described above. Since it is possible to easily check whether or not the information has been stolen, the possibility of fraud can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display device 1750 as in the present embodiment, for example, some electronic components such as the information display device 1750 have the viewing portion 1574. It is visible without intervention. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, making it easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the viewing portion 1574. Possible tampering with some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, the information display device 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition when the game board unit 12 of the game machine 1P is opened, so it is required to exhibit the effects described above.

[Other forms of the sixth embodiment]
Although the detailed description is omitted in the above-described embodiment, it also has seal portions 542, 1561, 1562, identification marks 521, 522, 523, and connectors 771-776. Of these, the seal portions 542, 1561, 1562 and the identification indications 521, 522, 523 display identifiable predetermined information, so they may be so-called identification indications. In addition, items displaying identifiable predetermined information include a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, and an information display device 1750 for displaying the performance display and setting display of the gaming machine. may be included in Furthermore, although not shown, among the various electronic components provided on the control board 1705, color codes displayed on lead resistors, identification codes displayed on network resistors, and model numbers displayed on ICs, capacitors, and transistors. Since the code or the like is also displayed with identifiable predetermined information, it may be regarded as an identification display. Since the connectors 771 to 776 in the above-described embodiment have different shapes of openings and different numbers of pins, the shape of the openings and the number of pins of each of the connectors 771 to 776 are identifiable information. It may be included in the display. Although not shown, a connector number is displayed on the control board 1705 near each of the connectors 771 to 776. This connector number is also identifiable information and is included in the identification display. good too.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the electronic components of the control board 1705 can be viewed from the viewing portion 1574 of the sealing portion 1710, but the area in which the electronic components can be viewed is limited to this. However, as long as the electronic components of the control board 1705 are visible through the board case 1705, various forms may be used, and the same effects can be obtained. For example, if a difficult-to-see region is provided in a plurality of colored regions, and the control substrate can be seen from a region with higher light transmission than the colored region among the plurality of difficult-to-see regions, the same applies to the region. effect. In addition, in these visible areas, not only the electronic components of the control board but also the control board itself, the wiring pattern of the control board, the legs of the electronic parts, etc. are visible, and the same effect is achieved. . In addition, in these visible areas, a transparent socket (connector) for ROM, which will be described later, is also visible, and transparent sockets (connectors) can be used not only for ROM but also for various electronic components such as ICs, transistors, and various resistors. are provided, their transparent sockets (connectors) are visible. If such a visible area is provided, there is a similar effect that it is possible to deter fraudulent acts on electronic components.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, but as described with reference to FIGS. An identification mark 523 may be provided. Such identification display 523 may be composed of characters 1371 to 1376 as described above, but is not limited to this and may be of various configurations. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of identifiable predetermined information, that is, composed of a plurality of identification indications. That is, a plurality of identification indications may be divided into a plurality of layers and formed. For example, a configuration as shown in FIG. 169 may be used. 169A and 169B are diagrams for explaining a modification of the identification display formed inside the member forming the substrate case, and FIG. , (b) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display portion 1796 of a circuit board case 1795 according to a modification. 169 are formed by 3D laser engraving inside the identification display portions 1791 and 1796, for example, like the identification display 523 in FIGS. 159 and 160. FIG. Also, the identification marks 1794, 1799 and the identification mark 523 (see FIGS. 159 and 160) may be formed by molding the substrate case with a mold.

As shown in FIG. 169(a), the identification display 1794 on the circuit board case 1790 according to the modification is composed of five identification displays "A", "B", "C", "0", and "3". It is formed inside a member forming the identification display portion 1791 (the material of the outer case). Further, the identification display 1794 is divided into three layers 1793a to 1793c in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1791 and provided. In identification 1794, "A" identification 1792b is formed in hierarchy 1793a, "B" identification 1792c is formed in hierarchy 1793b, and "C" identification 1792a and "0" are formed. The identification display 1792d of and the identification display 1792e of "3" are formed so as not to overlap in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 73-1) in the layer 1793c. When the identification display portion 1791 having such a configuration is viewed from the left side (direction from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 73-1), each of "A", "B", and "C03" are different. The identification display 1794 can be visually recognized in such a way that "C", "0", and "3" do not overlap with each other.

As shown in FIG. 169(b), an identification mark 1799 on a circuit board case 1795 according to the modified example includes "A", "B", "C", "0", and "3" in the same manner as the identification mark 1794. It is composed of five identification marks, and is formed inside a member (material of the outer case) that forms the identification display portion 1796 . Further, the identification display 1794 is divided into four layers 1793a to 1793d in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1791 and provided. In identification 1799, identification 1797b of "A" is formed in hierarchy 1798a, identification 1797d of "B" and identification 1797c of "0" are formed in hierarchy 1798b, and identification 1797c of "0" is formed in hierarchy 1798b. identification 1797a is formed on level 1798c, and identification 1797e of "C" is formed on level 1798d. When the identification display portion 1796 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine 1P, the identification display can be viewed so that "A", "B", and "C" do not overlap in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 163). When the portion 1796 is viewed from the left side (direction from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 163), the identification display 1799 configured such that each of "0" and "3" do not overlap in different hierarchies should be viewed. can be done.

According to the identification indications 1794, 1799 and the identification indication 523 (see FIGS. 159 and 160) having such a configuration, the distance from the top surface of the substrate case to the specific identification indication differs, and the distance from the substrate case is different. The distance from the control board 1705 to the particular identification can be different. Specifically, for example, in the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b is set to have a smaller distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 than the identification display 1792a, but a larger distance from the control board 1705. formed. Further, the identification mark 1792c is formed so that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 is smaller than the identification mark 1792a but larger than the identification mark 1792b. On the other hand, the identification mark 1792c is formed so that the distance from the control board 1705 is larger than the identification mark 1792a but smaller than the identification mark 1792b.

Further, according to the identification indications 1794, 1799 and the identification indication 523 (see FIGS. 159 and 160) having such a configuration, the surfaces constituting the thickness of the identification indication portion (the side surfaces in the horizontal direction in FIG. 163) The distance from the plane) to the particular identification can also be configured differently. Further, according to the identification indications 1794, 1799 and the identification indication 523 (see FIGS. 159 and 160) having such a configuration, the top surface of the substrate case, the control substrate 1705, and the surfaces constituting the thickness of the identification indication portion It is also possible to configure such that the distance of the specific identification mark from any of the is substantially the same. As described above, if the identification mark is divided into a plurality of layers and formed inside the member forming the identification display portion, it is difficult to remove each identification mark as described above, and if it is scraped and removed Since traces of removal remain in the , the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. In the above, the distance from the control board 1705 to each identification sign means the distance from the surface of the control board 1705 on which the wiring pattern is formed to each identification sign.

Further, according to the identification display 1799 having such a configuration, it is possible to configure the identification display so that the visible direction and angle are different for each identification display. Specifically, as described above, identification display 1797a and identification display 1797b in identification display 1799 are configured to be visible from different directions and angles. Therefore, with the identification display formed in this manner, the identification display can be formed in a direction or angle that is easily visible by the inspector, which can lead to suppression of fraudulent behavior. In the vicinity of the identification display part, if there is a member that hinders the visibility of the identification display (for example, a member that is thicker than the identification display part), the visibility is not hindered by the member. Each identification can also be formed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the identification display portion, it is possible not to provide a member that obstructs the visual recognition of the identification display.

Furthermore, in the above-described identification indications 1794 and 1799, the identification indications 1792a to 1792e and 1797a to 1797e are individually independent. It may be something that constitutes an identification mark. Specifically, in the identification display 1794, two identification displays 1792b and 1792c constitute identifiable predetermined information, and three identification displays 1792a, 1792d and 1792e constitute identifiable predetermined information. may be In the identification display 1799, two identification displays 1797a and 1797c constitute identifiable predetermined information, and three identification displays 1797b, 1797d and 1797e constitute identifiable predetermined information. Different identification displays may be configured according to different directions and angles. Further, in the identification displays 1794 and 1799, each of the five identification displays may constitute one piece of identifiable predetermined information, similar to the identification display 523 described with reference to FIGS. Specific examples of such five identification indications constituting one piece of identifiable predetermined information include a combination of "manufactured", "manufactured", "number", "number", and "no.". More specifically, for example, in the identification display section 1791, "manufactured" and "manufactured" are displayed as identification displays on hierarchy 1793a, "number" and "number" are displayed on hierarchy 1793b as identification displays, and hierarchy 1793c is displayed. "NO." In addition, in the identification display section 1390 (see FIGS. 159 and 160), the identification display "manufactured" is displayed at the position of the identification display 1371 of the hierarchy 1381, and the identification display " is displayed as an identification display at the position of the identification number 1373 of the hierarchy 1383, "number" is displayed as the identification display at the position of the identification number 1374 of the hierarchy 1384, and identification display 1375 of the hierarchy 1382 is displayed. is displayed as the identification display at the position of , and "1234" is displayed as the identification display at the position of the identification number 1376 of the hierarchy 1383 .

According to the identification displays 1794 and 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 159 and 160), the identification displays are "A", "B", "C", "0" and "3". Although it is configured with five identification indications, it is not limited to this, and identification indications of various modes may be displayed. Specifically, in the identification display section 1791, the hierarchy 1793a displays the “manufacturer name” as the identification display, the hierarchy 1793b displays the “model name” as the identification display, and the hierarchy 1793c displays the “manufacturing place” as the identification display. "Date of manufacture" and "Material name of control board" may be displayed. Further, as another specific example of the identification display section 1791, a "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1793a, a "model name" is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1793b, and an identification is displayed on the hierarchy 1793c. The display may be such that the "manufacturer name" is displayed. Further, in the identification display portion 1791, "manufactured" and "manufactured" are displayed as identification displays on layer 1793a, "number" and "number" are displayed on layer 1793b as identification displays, and "NO" is displayed on layer 1793c as identification displays. .” and “1234” may be displayed.

In the identification display section 1390 (see FIGS. 159 and 160), the hierarchy 1381 displays the “manufacturer name” as the identification display, the hierarchy 1382 displays the “model name” as the identification display, and the hierarchy 1383 displays the “model name” as the identification display. It is also possible to display "manufacturing location" and "manufacturing date" as identification displays, and display "material name of control board" as identification display in layer 1384. FIG. Further, as another specific example of the identification display unit 1390, a "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1381, a "model name" is displayed on the hierarchy 1382 as an identification display, and an identification is displayed on the hierarchy 1383. It is also possible to display the “manufacturer name” as the display and the “control board material name” as the identification display in the hierarchy 1384 . Further, in the identification display section 1390, "Made" and "Made" are displayed as identification displays on the hierarchy 1381, "Number" and "No." are displayed on the hierarchy 1382 as identification displays, and "NO" is displayed on the hierarchy 1383 as the identification display. "." is displayed, "1234" is displayed as an identification display in the layer 1384, and each identification display is displayed so as not to overlap so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine 1P. good.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments, the identification display formed on the identification display portion of the board case has been described in detail, but the identifiable predetermined information may be displayed on the control board. For example, in some control means having a control board and a board case, various identification marks are displayed at different positions in the thickness direction of the board case. Specifically, the "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display at the position closest to the top surface of the board case, and the position closer to the control board than the "QR code (registered trademark)" as the identification display. In some cases, the "model name" is displayed as an identification display, and the "manufacturer's name" is displayed at the position closest to the control board or on the control board itself.

(Seventh embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 179, a seventh embodiment, which is one of modifications of the fifth embodiment described above, will be described. FIG. 170 is a rear view of the board case 1803 in which the control board 501 according to the seventh embodiment is housed. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a state in which the electronic component 595 is seen obliquely from above through the seal portions 1560 and 1561. FIG. 172 is (a) a plan view and (b) a side view of the transparent socket 1801. FIG. 173 are cross-sectional views (a) to (d) of substrate cases 1805 to 1808 at positions corresponding to line CC in FIG. 170. FIG. 174 are cross-sectional views (a) and (b) of substrate cases 1809 and 1810 at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. 170. FIG. FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing a special position display section 541. FIG. FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram of one method of reducing the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560. FIG. FIG. 177 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1813 containing the prize ball substrate 1811. FIG. FIG. 178 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1823 housing the effect board 1821. FIG. In addition, in the seventh embodiment described below, the same reference numerals as in the fifth embodiment are used for the same configurations as in the fifth embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 170, the gaming machine 1P of the seventh embodiment mainly includes a control board 501, a ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501, a plurality of electronic boards 595 mounted on the control board 501, and a case for housing them. A portion 1803 , a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 attached to the case portion 1803 , a seal portion 1562 attached to the ROM 502 , and an identification display portion 1390 provided on the case portion 1803 . The parts other than the case part 1803 have already been explained. The case portion 1803 has almost the same contents as the case portion 1551 except that the position display portion 541 is provided on the seal portion 1560 .

As described above, the information identification portion indicates a seal portion with an identification mark, but in the explanation of the sixth embodiment, a seal portion without an identification mark will not appear. Therefore, in the description of the sixth embodiment, the seal portion is called an information identification portion. Specifically, the seal portion 1560 may be called a first seal portion, and may be called a first information identification portion. The seal portion 1561 may be called a second seal portion, and may be called a second information identification portion. The seal portion 1562 may be called a third information identification portion. Also, it is possible to regard the entire seal portion as an aggregate of a plurality of information identification portions rather than as one information identification portion. For this reason, for example, when the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, it may be described as including three information identification portions.

[Mounting part of ROM 502]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172, the ROM 502 is detachably attached to the control board 501 via a transparent socket (connector) 1801 . FIG. 172(a) is a plan view of the ROM mounted in the transparent socket, and FIG. 172(b) is a side view of the ROM mounted in the transparent socket. Note that the control board 501 is omitted in both figures. The transparent socket 1801 has the same function as a normal socket, but is taller and the resin portion of the socket is made of a transparent material. That is, even inside the socket, it is possible to visually check whether an improper wiring or the like is connected to the first signal pin 582 of the ROM 502 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as so-called hanging boards. Furthermore, when the transparent socket 1801 is mounted on the control board 501, the pins 1802a of the transparent socket 1801 are visible. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized wiring or the like from being connected to the pin 1802a. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

[Position display part 541] Cross-sectional view in the direction of arrows at a position corresponding to the CC line in FIG. 170 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. there is FIG. 173(d) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of the case portion 1803 at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. As shown in FIG. 173(d), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1803 is a linear recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803, which is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560. It is a concave portion that is recessed toward . A seal portion 1560 having a printed portion 1571 printed thereon is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1803 .

As a modification of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, a position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portions 1103 and 1203, and the seal portion 1560 is positioned on the outer surface 531 using this as a mark. You may make it stick (not shown). As another modification, as shown in FIG. 173(c), the position display portion 541 may be a linear projection. FIG. 173(c) shows an arrow-direction cross-section of a case portion 1807, which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. As shown in FIG. 173(c), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1807 is a linear protrusion formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1807, which is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560. protrudes to A seal portion 1560 having a printed portion 1571 printed thereon is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1807 . That is, the position display portion 541 described in this paragraph and the preceding paragraph is formed on the inner surface 532 by concave and/or convex.

In this way, when the concave and/or convex position display portion is formed on the inner surface 532 and the seal portion 1560 is adhered to the outer surface 531, the position display portion 541 remains the same as the seal portion 1560 regardless of where the seal portion is adhered. Since there is no interference, it does not interfere with application. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display portion 541 , the inspector can easily confirm the printed portion 1571 printed on the seal portion 1560 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, when a seal portion is attached to the outer surface 531 and the position display portion 541 is provided on the inner surface 532, the position display portion 541 is the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531 and/or the inner edge of the seal portion 1560, Or/and the inside and outside of the sealing part 1560 can be formed so as to intersect. This will be briefly explained. In FIG. 175, the position display portion 541a provided on the case portion 1820 is formed on the inner edge of the seal portion 1560, and the portion of the position display portion 541b extending in the left-right direction in FIG. It is formed to intersect. The portion of the position display portion 541 extending in the vertical direction in the drawing is on the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and it can be said that this is also formed so as to intersect the inside and the outside.

Further, as a modification of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. good too. FIG. 171(a) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of a position corresponding to line CC shown in FIG. 170 in case portion 1805 which is a modification of case portion 1803. As shown in FIG. 171(a), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1805 is a linear protrusion formed on the outer surface 531 that is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and protrudes rearward. there is A seal portion 1560 with a printed portion 1571 printed thereon is attached to the inner side of the position display portion 541 .

Since the position display portion 541, which is a linear convex portion, is provided, for example, when the seal portion 1560 is touched by a hand, the seal portion 1560 is more likely to be removed than when the seal portion 1560 is attached to the flat case portion. Peeling can be prevented. That is, it is possible to use the seal portion 1560 as a mark for sticking and to prevent the peeling of the seal portion 1560 after sticking. If a part of the seal portion 1560 is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, since the seal portion 1560 is protected by such a position display portion 541 , the inspector can easily confirm the printed portion 1571 printed on the seal portion 1560 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

As another modified example, as shown in FIG. It is good also as a recessed part of shape. FIG. 171(b) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of a position corresponding to line CC shown in FIG. 170 in case portion 1806 which is a modification of case portion 1803 . As shown in FIG. 171(b), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1806 is a linear recess formed on the outer surface 531 that is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and is recessed forward. It is a recess. A seal portion 1560 with a printed portion 1571 printed thereon is attached to the inner side of the position display portion 541 .

As another modification, as shown in FIG. 174(a), the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1809, the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531, and the position display portion 541 is provided on the inner surface. 532 may also be provided. FIG. 174(a) shows a cross section of a case portion 1809, which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to line CC shown in FIG. The position display portion 541 on the outer surface 531 protects the seal portion 1560 , and the position display portion 541 on the inner surface 532 allows the seal portion 1560 to be adhered to a more accurate position.

As another modification, as shown in FIG. 174(b), the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1810, and the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. It is good also as a part and a recessed part. FIG. 174(b) shows a cross section of a case portion 1810, which is a modification of the case portion 183, at a position corresponding to line CC shown in FIG. Seal portion 1560 can be more protected.

Although the position display portion 541 is a convex portion and/or a concave portion, it may not be a convex portion and/or a concave portion as long as the position where the seal portion 1560 is attached can be displayed. The position display portion 541 is formed at a position avoiding a viewing portion 1574, which will be described later. It should be noted that the term "formed" is not limited to being integrally formed, but also includes being attached with a seal or the like. Further, the position display portion 541 may be an L-shaped one that displays the position of a portion (corner portion) of the seal portion 1560 . Further, the predetermined position behind the first surface 531 of the case portion 1803 does not only refer to the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803 . If it is assumed that the seal portion 1560 is attached without the substrate 501, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner case 40P, and the seal portion 1560 is attached with the substrate 501 included. A position indicator 541 may be provided on the substrate, if desired.

[Seal portion 1560]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170, the seal portion 1560 printed with the printed portion 1571 has a predetermined light transmittance lower than that of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561 and allows the electronic component 595 to be seen through. It has optical transparency. The optical transparency of seal 1560 need not be uniform. For example, the light transmission may be reduced by printing something like a pattern. In this case, even if the light transmittance differs from part to part, it is sufficient that the light transmittance as a whole is lower than that of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561 . Also in this embodiment, a pattern of thin lines is printed in the hatched portion in the figure to reduce the light transmittance. The fact that the light transmittance differs depending on the pattern will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 176 . In FIG. 176(a), the background of the seal portion 1560 has a wave-like pattern, and in FIG. 176(b), the background of the seal portion 1560a has a lattice pattern. Both companies can see through the electronic component 595, but it can be seen that the light transmittance of FIG. 176(a) is lower.

The case portion 1803 has the highest predetermined light transmittance, and the seal portion 1561 has a predetermined light transmittance slightly lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 . As a result, the ROM 502 is visible due to the optical transparency of the case portion 1803 , and the electronic component 595 is visible due to the optical transparency of the sealing portion 1561 or the sealing portion 1560 . As a method for making the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561, the light transmittance of the material of the seal portion 1561 may be lowered. You can reduce the permeability.

Forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult than when the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 and the light transmittance of the case portion 1551 and the seal portion 1561 are the same, and the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. In addition, when the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern, it is not apparent at first glance that the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170, unique information 1804 that can be identified only when viewed from a predetermined angle is attached to a portion of the seal portion 1560 that is not a colored region 1575 but to which predetermined characters are attached. (K in this embodiment) is displayed. In this embodiment, characters are used, but symbols or drawings may be used. Further, the continuity of the pattern changes at the boundary between the first area 1814 in which unique information is formed by patterns and the second area 1815 in which unique information is formed by characters and patterns. This makes it more difficult to forge the seal portion 1560, thereby further suppressing the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced. Note that the seal portion 1560 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 171, at least one or more different electronic components 595 are attached in the range visible through the seal portion 1561 and the range visible through the seal portion 1560 . By affixing a seal portion having optical transparency according to the type of the electronic component 595, fraud can be easily discovered and fraud can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The information to be written on the seal portion 1561 may include the model name, model code, external terminal information, manufacturer name, QR code (registered trademark), rated voltage, power consumption, precautions, and the like. In addition, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1560 are pasted at a position having an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized.

[First Display, Second Display]
Further, in the present embodiment, the case portion 1803 including the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the electronic component 595 is called control means, and the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are provided at different predetermined locations in the control means. ing. The first display 1371 and the second display 1372 have different distances from the surface 501a of the control board 501 on which the ROM 502 is mounted until the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are displayed. Note that the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 indicate not only the identification display section 1390 but also the surface 501a of the control board 501 on the side where the ROM of the control board 501 is mounted, as shown in FIG. If the distance from is different, this is also included. The surface 501a of the control board 501 on the side of the outer case 45P, the opposite surface thereof, the marking on the inner case 40P, the marking on the outer case 45P, various seals, and the like are assumed.

However, it is assumed that the information identification part and the display do not represent the same information. It should be noted that the seal portion and the information identification portion are not synonymous, and that there may be a plurality of information identification portions in one seal portion. For example, when the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, it means that there are three information identification portions. An example will be given to explain the relationship between the information identification unit and the display. For example, if the first information identification portion is the manufacturer's name, the first display is not the manufacturer's name, but the model name displayed on the sticker. Further, the second display is, for example, the model name displayed on the surface of the substrate 501 on the side of the inner case 40P. The second information identification part is, for example, information about the person who opened the seal part 1560 , and the third information identification part is, for example, the name of the manufacturer of the seal part 1562 . Since the control means is provided with complicated first and second displays indicating different distances from the control board, counterfeiting of the board 501 and the case portion 1803 can be prevented.

[Prize ball board 1811]
Also, in this embodiment, the prize ball substrate 1811 and its case portion 1813 are included in the configuration of the invention. As shown in FIG. 177, the prize ball substrate 1811 capable of two-way communication with the control substrate 501 is accommodated in a case portion 1813 having optical transparency. A ROM 1812 is attached to the prize ball board 1811 . Also, a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1812 are mounted on the prize ball board 1811 . The ROM 1812 stores data used for controlling prize balls.

A seal portion 1816 made of a light-transmissive material is attached to the case portion 1813 . The seal portion 1816 is printed with a plurality of colored regions 1817, which are regions with reduced light transmittance. Further, the seal portion 1816 has a peep portion 1819 through which the electronic component 595 can be seen, in a portion between the colored regions 1817 where the predetermined characters are not attached. Sealing portion 1560 and sealing portion 1816 are optically transparent so that electronic component 595 can be seen through, and sealing portion 1560 and sealing portion 1816 are different in optical transparency. In this embodiment, seal portion 1560 has lower light transmittance than seal portion 1816 . For example, the seal portion 1560 may have a wave-like pattern as shown in FIG. 176(a), and the seal portion 1816 may have a lattice pattern as shown in FIG. 176(b).

Since the seal part 1560 and the seal part 1816 have different light transmittance, it is difficult to forge the seal parts 1560 and 1816, and to make it difficult to cheat by replacing the case parts 1551 and 1813 with the wrong substrates 501 and 1811. can be done. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Although not provided in the present embodiment, the case portion 1813 including the prize ball substrate 1811, the ROM 1812, and the electronic component 595 is used as the prize ball means, and the first and second displays are placed at different predetermined locations in the prize ball means. A third representation and a fourth representation may be provided as in (1371, 1372).

[Production board 1821]
Also, in this embodiment, the effect board 1821 and its case portion 1823 are included in the configuration of the invention. As shown in FIG. 178, an effect board 1821 capable of effect control by one-way communication from the control board 501 or prize ball board 1811 is accommodated in a case portion 1823 having light transmission properties. A ROM 1822 is mounted on the performance board 1821 . In addition, a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1822 are mounted on the effect board 1821 . The ROM 1822 stores storage contents used for control of production. The control board 501 and prize ball board 1811 are foot-type boards as shown in FIG. 175, and the performance board 1821 is a surface-mount type board. Examples of surface mounting include double-sided surface mounting, single-sided surface mounting, full surface mounting, and partial surface mounting.

The case portion 1823 is formed of a light-transmitting material like the seal portion 1560, and is printed with a plurality of colored regions having reduced light-transmitting properties. A seal portion having a viewing portion for viewing the electronic component 595 is not affixed to the portion not marked with . A seal portion having a colored region and a peep portion is not attached to the case portion 1823 but is attached only to the case portion 1803 . Since the seal portions are treated differently in this way, it becomes difficult to forge the seal portion 1560 and the case portion 1803, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 179, the control board 501 may have a first region 1900a and a second region 1900b that is different from the first region 1900a. Here, the different aspects refer to differences that can be visually recognized. For example, the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b have different colors, or different shades of color. , the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are surrounded by lines or patterns, and the like, and the shape of the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are steps, and the like. can be used one or a combination of For example, the second region 1900b of the resist applied to the surface of the control substrate 501 may be colored darker or lighter green than the first region 1900a. Moreover, it is preferable to set the first area 1900a corresponding to the range in which the ROM 502 and the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 are arranged on the control board 501 . On the other hand, the second area 1900b is preferably set to correspond to a range in which the ROM 502, the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502, and board-mounted components such as the connectors 771 to 776 are not arranged on the control board 501. For example, , should be set at the edge of the control board 501 . In the first area 1900a and the second area 1900b themselves, the above-described colors and other aspects may be different. It is good also as a different aspect. The first area 1900a and the second area 1900b can be provided on either or both of the mounting surface (rear surface) of the control board 501 and the front surface facing the rear surface of the game board unit 12P. Alternatively, the first region 1900a may be provided on one of the rear surface and the front surface of the control substrate 501, and the second region 1900b may be provided on the other of the rear surface and the front surface of the control substrate 501. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 179, the control board 501 may be provided with an information identification section 1902 for displaying specific information in the second area 1900b. The information identification section 1902 may include an identification display 521 containing information similar to the identification display 529 described above. In this way, by providing the information identification section 1902 in the second area 1900b that is different in form from the first area 1900a, the information displayed in the information identification section 1902 can be made easier to see. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to determine whether or not the control board 501 has been tampered with, thus facilitating management. Then, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

When distinguishing the control board 501 in particular, the board excluding board-mounted components such as the mounted electronic components 502 and 595 is sometimes referred to as a "board", and a "board" on which board-mounted components are mounted is referred to as a "board". It is sometimes called a control unit. The first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are preferably provided on the substrate, but regions of different modes may be provided on the substrate-mounted component.

The identification display 523 described above is divided into a plurality of layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display portion 1390, and only the identification display 523 provided on the outer case 45P is provided. Instead, an identification display 524 provided on the inner case 40P, an identification display 525 provided on the cap 8P, an identification display 521 provided on the control board 501, an identification display 522 provided on the ROM 502, etc. are attached to the control unit. It can be applied to identification 520 . Objects divided into the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are not limited to the characters 1371 to 1376, and may be a display consisting of a plurality of identifiers such as graphics, patterns, codes, and combinations of characters. For example, the relationship between identification marks 520 may be divided into hierarchies 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 as described above.

The positions of the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are described with reference to the object provided with the identification display 523 (thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390). If the position is different in the thickness direction of the outer case 45P and the identification mark 524 provided on the inner case 40P is different, the position is different in the thickness direction of the inner case 40P and the identification mark 521 provided on the control board 501 or the board mounted component. , 522, the positions are different in the thickness direction of the substrate. The identification mark 521 attached to the board and the identification mark 522 attached to the ROM 502 are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the board. It can be said that it is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate from the identification mark attached to the front surface. In addition, the outer case 45P constituting the surface on which the board-mounted components are mounted is further away from the board than the inner case 40P in order to secure an installation space for the board-mounted components. and the identification mark 524 attached to the inner case 40P are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the substrate.

The identification indications associated with each other are not limited to the form in which the relationship can be directly recognized by the manufacturer, etc., but can be compared with the information held by the administrator, or converted by the device owned by the administrator. It may be a relationship in which the relevance can be grasped by doing. For example, the identification marks 523 to 525 attached to the substrate case 3P are the identification marks 521, 521 attached to the control board 501.
522, but by referring to the information held by the administrator, both identification indications 520 include common information. In other words, the identification indications associated with each other may include a mode in which the relevance can be directly grasped from visually recognizable information and a mode in which the relevance cannot be directly grasped from visually recognizable information. . In this manner, since the relationship between the identification indications cannot be seen at a glance, it becomes difficult for anyone other than the manufacturer or the administrator to rewrite the information, and the possibility of fraud can be reduced, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

In this case, "first display", "second display", "third display", "fourth display", "first information display", "second information display", "first information identification part", The "second information identification section", the "third information identification section", and the "fourth information identification section" are not limited to those described in the above embodiments, and the seal, code information and characters printed on the seal, and , model name, manufacturer's name, board management information, case management information, and other information display methods and display contents about the game machine on the board or board case.

Although the first to seventh embodiments have been described, the configurations are not limited to those of the first to seventh embodiments, and these embodiments (first to seventh embodiments) can be used as appropriate. A combined configuration is also possible. For example, the first embodiment may be combined with the variable end suggestion effect described in the fourth embodiment, the fourth embodiment may be combined with the second embodiment, or the first embodiment to the second embodiment may be combined. You may combine 4th Embodiment. It should be noted that the combinations illustrated here are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to these combinations, and any combination may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment, when the left and right performance symbols 70a of the same type are temporarily stopped and displayed (when a so-called ready-to-win state is established), the middle performance symbol 70a remains fluctuating at a high speed. However, at least for a certain period of time during the normal ready-to-win effect, the display may be changed at a low speed. In this case, the left and right performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle performance symbols are displayed with low speed fluctuation display. It can be said that it is a period (corresponding to the first period) in which the production pattern of left, middle, right) can be recognized. It should be noted that the effect pattern 70a may be displayed with low speed fluctuation during the normal reach effect instead of the low speed change display only during a certain period during the normal reach effect.

Further, in the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment, when the left and right performance symbols 70a of the same type are temporarily stopped and displayed (when the so-called reach is established), the left and right performance symbols 70a perform a predetermined operation (the first (corresponding to 1 staging and 2nd staging) may be executable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95 and the like, the production pattern 70a includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a tactile image SG that is a part of the character, and a pattern effect that decorates the background of the character. Assuming that the decorative portion is made up of an image ZE, and the identification portion is made up of a hexagonal base image and a numeric portion (identification character), the decorative portion may perform a predetermined operation.

<Regarding Other Inventions, etc. Described in the Above Embodiments>
Other inventions and the like described in the present embodiment will be described below.

In a conventional gaming machine, determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition is stored as a pending memory, and it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute a variable production based on. In such a game machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories, or by displaying the execution image corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable effect is executed, There have been some that allow a player to grasp the progress of a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and slave control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) , determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; The sub-control means includes variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on the image display means (image display device), first reservation information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and information display means capable of displaying second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, wherein the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms). The display image is updated each time, and when the number of the pending memories is reduced, the information display means can execute the display of the reduced number of the first reserved information and the reduced display of the second reserved information, and the second Decreasing display of the first pending information (to the pending number decremented by 1) is earlier than the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the 2 pending information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the pending icon display area) is completed. update) is completed earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and slave control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) , determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; The sub-control means includes: variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on the image display means (image display device); first reservation information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories; and information display means capable of displaying second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, wherein the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms). The display image is updated each time, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first reserved information, and displays the second reserved information in which the variable effect is started as execution information (the relevant icon), and the change display of the second pending information to the execution information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the decrease display of the first pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the update timing. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and slave control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) , determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; The sub-control means includes: variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on the image display means (image display device); first reservation information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories; and information display means capable of displaying second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, wherein the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms). The display image is updated each time, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the reduced first pending information and the decreased display of the second pending information, and the pending When the number of memories increases, an increase display of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information can be performed, and the number of the reserved memories increases during the decreasing display of the second reserved information. In this case, even before the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the pending icon display area) is completed, the increasing display of the first pending information (update to pending number incremented by 1) is to be initiated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and slave control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) , determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; The sub-control means includes: variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on the image display means (image display device); first reservation information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories; and information display means capable of displaying second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, wherein the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms). The display image is updated each time the display image is updated, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first reserved information and displays the second reserved information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the relevant icon), and when the number of the pending memories increases, it is possible to execute the increasing display of the first pending information and the increasing display of the second pending information, 2. If the number of pending memories increases during change display of the pending information, the frame update that completes the decreasing display of the second pending information (move from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area). Even before the timing, the increasing display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and slave control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) , determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; The sub-control means includes: variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on the image display means (image display device); first reservation information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories; and information display means capable of displaying second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, wherein the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms). The display image is updated each time, and the information display means is capable of executing an increased display of the first pending information and an increased display of the second pending information when the number of the pending memories increases, and the variable When the number of pending memories increases during the execution of the effect, the frame update completes the increased display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to the normal size). The frame update timing at which the increment display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the timing. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and slave control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) , determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; The sub-control means includes: variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on the image display means (image display device); first reservation information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories; and an information display means capable of displaying second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, and the variable effect executing means is configured to execute the special game during execution of the variable effect. It is possible to execute specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, all-rotation ready-to-win effect) that are expected to be executed, and the information display means increases display of the first pending information when the number of the pending memories increases. , increasing display of the second pending information, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, increasing display of the first pending information (adding 1 to the pending number update) is executed, but the increase display of the second pending information is not executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the jackpot effect pattern that has been displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner). ing. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and slave control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory; and a normal game state; , game state control means capable of controlling a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the sub control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination by image display means (image display means). display device), a first pending information (a pending number) indicating the number of the pending memories, and a second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories; and an information display means capable of displaying, when the number of the pending memories increases, the information displaying means can execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as a first reserved storage, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (second starting The determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth) is stored as a second reservation memory, and when the number of the first reservation memory increases in the specific game state, the increase display of the first reservation information (1 The update to the added reserved number) is executed, but the increase display of the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is established (finishing the last variation performance in the specific game state, returning to the normal game state). It's like By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition, and based on the determination result, the variable performance of the performance symbol is performed. It is common to execute it on an image display device. In such a game machine, there are a plurality of types of variation patterns for the variable performance of the performance symbols, and selection is made from among the plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result, and the variation performance of the performance symbols in the selected variation pattern is displayed as an image. It was displayed on a display device (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is room for improvement in the aspect of the variable effect of the effect symbols, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be lowered.

◆As a first configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, when a symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) that can be controlled to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. , the variable effect control means, during the variable display of the pattern, the effect pattern is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows, and a swingable recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive effect, FIG. 50-2 (c), FIG. 52-2 (d)) is executed in the first time, and the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows is executed. It is possible to execute a stop effect for 2 hours, and the stop display mode includes a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the different effect symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of rows, and the plurality of rows. There is a second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) in which at least two of them are stop-displayed with the common effect symbols, and in the first state and the second state, the execution time of the first time. are different, and the mode of the predetermined effect (fluctuation end suggesting effect) in the effect pattern during the first time can be controlled to be different. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As a second configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above problems, when the symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) that can be controlled to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. , the variable effect control means, during the variable display of the pattern, the effect pattern is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows, and a swingable recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive effect, FIG. 50-2 (c), FIG. 52-2 (d)) is performed during the first time, and during the variable display of the symbols, the common display mode ( The stop effect can be executed by executing the first display mode) and the second time, and the common display mode is the case of executing the first variation effect (variation patterns 2A to 2C) and the first variation effect. There is a case of executing a second variation performance (variation patterns 3A to 3C) with a higher degree of expectation for the execution of the special game, and a case of executing the first variation performance and the second variation performance. It is possible to perform control so that the execution time of the first time is different and the mode of the predetermined effect (fluctuation end suggesting effect) in the effect symbol during the first time is different between when it is executed and when it is executed. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As a third configuration of the game machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, when the symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. , During the variable display of the symbols, the performance symbols can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and a recognizable display mode that can be swung (variation end suggesting performance, FIGS. 50-2(c), (e) , FIG. 52-1(d), FIG. 52-2(d), FIG. 53(e)) can execute the stop effect at the first time, and the predetermined effect ( There is a case where a battle effect, a resurrection effect, a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed and a case where the predetermined effect is not executed. It is possible to perform control so that the execution time of the first time is different and the mode of the predetermined effect (fluctuation end suggesting effect) in the effect pattern during the first time is different. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As a fourth configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, when the symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) that can be controlled to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. , the variable effect control means, during the variable display of the pattern, the effect pattern is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows, and a swingable recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive effect, FIG. 52-1 (d), Fig. 53 (e)) is executed at a first time, and a second time at which a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of rows is stopped. A case of executing a predetermined effect (pseudo continuous effect, resurrection effect) in which the effect can be executed and the recognizable display mode is executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation of the pattern, and a case of not executing the predetermined effect. and, when the predetermined effect is executed, the execution time of the first time is increased compared to the case where the predetermined effect is not executed, and the specific effect symbol is displayed in the stop display mode. It can be controlled so that it is easier to stop and display. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As a fifth configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above problems, when the symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. , the variable effect control means, during the variable display of the pattern, the effect pattern is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows, and a swingable recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive effect, FIG. 50-2 (c), FIG. 52-2(d)) is executed at a first time, and a second time at which a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows is performed, The stop effect can be executed by, and the stop display mode includes a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the different effect symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of rows, and at least two of the plurality of rows are There is a second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) in which the common performance symbols are stop-displayed, and the second state extends the execution time of the first time compared to the first state. It is possible to perform control so that predetermined effects (battle effect, resurrection effect, pseudo-continuous effect) for increasing the degree of anticipation are likely to be executed before the recognizable display mode is executed. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As a sixth configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, when the symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. , the variable effect control means, during the variable display of the pattern, the effect pattern is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows, and a swingable recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive effect, FIG. 50-2 (e), FIG. 52-1(d), FIG. 53(e)) are executed, and a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows is performed. and a second time to execute a stop effect, and the stop display mode includes a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the different effect symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of rows, and the specified There is a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) in which performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and the second state extends the execution time of the first time compared to the first state, and the recognition It is possible to perform control so that predetermined effects (battle effect, resurrection effect, pseudo-continuous effect) for increasing the degree of expectation are likely to be executed before execution of the possible display mode. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a seventh configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above problems, when the symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. The variable performance control means executes a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive performance, etc.) in which the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows during the variable display of the symbols. A stop effect can be executed by a first time and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows, and the stop display mode is There are a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) different from the first state, and the second state is different from the first state in the recognition It is possible to perform control so that a predetermined effect (variation end suggesting effect) is likely to be executed during execution of the possible display mode. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As an eighth configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above problems, when the symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. The variable performance control means executes a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive performance, etc.) in which the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows during the variable display of the symbols. A stop effect can be executed by a first time and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows, and the stop display mode is There are a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the performance symbols different from the specific performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific performance symbols are stopped and displayed. , the second state is controllable so that a predetermined effect (fluctuation end suggesting effect) is more likely to be executed during execution of the recognizable display mode than in the first state. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As a ninth configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above problems, when the symbol (special effect symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the symbol is stopped at a predetermined specific symbol, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) that can be controlled to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. The variable performance control means executes a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive performance, etc.) in which the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows during the variable display of the symbols. A stop effect can be executed by a first time and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of rows, and the stop display mode is There are a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the different performance symbols are stop-displayed in each of the plurality of rows, and a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific performance symbols are stop-displayed. , the first state can be controlled so that a predetermined effect (fluctuation end suggesting effect) is less likely to be executed during execution of the recognizable display mode than in the second state. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As a tenth configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above problems, when a pattern (special effect pattern TZ) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the pattern is stopped at a predetermined specific pattern, the game is played. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players, a variable performance of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) displayed in a plurality of rows on a display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the variable display of the symbols. and a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling to stop and display the performance symbols with predetermined specific performance symbols when the symbols are stop-displayed with the specific symbols. The variable performance control means executes a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestive performance, etc.) in which the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows during the variable display of the symbols. A stop effect can be executed in a first time, and a predetermined effect (fluctuation end suggesting effect) in the effect pattern during the first time can be controlled to be different between a high probability state and a low probability state. be. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ [Invention 1]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 1 comprises a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive storage section (board a control means (assembly 2P) having a case 1700); a seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material; A first information display portion (description region 1570, code portion 1712, information display portion 1713) for displaying information about the control means, and a position different from the seal portion in the storage portion to display information about the control means. and a second information display portion (date mark portion 1720) for displaying a plurality of colored regions (printing portion 1711, a plurality of region 1575) and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, a portion where a predetermined character is not attached, and the storage and a visible region (peek portion 1574) in which the control board housed in the portion can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in Invention 1, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 Although the displayed date of manufacture is different information, it has a predetermined chronological relationship. Specifically, the date of opening described in description area 1570 of seal portion 1720 is always newer than the date of manufacture displayed in date mark portion 1720 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the consistency between the date of opening of the written area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date of manufacture of the date mark portion 1720, thereby avoiding fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. can be easily verified.

◆ [Invention 2]
The game machine (game machine 1P) of invention 2 comprises a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive storage section (board a control means (assembly 2P) having a case 1700); a first seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a material having optical transparency; A first information display portion (code portion 1712, information display portion 1713) and a second information display portion (description area 1570) for displaying information about the control means provided, and the first seal portion in the storage portion and a third information display portion (code portion 1732) provided in the second seal portion for displaying information about the control means. and, wherein the first information display unit and the third information display unit include an identification display in a predetermined manner readable by a terminal device, and the second information display unit reduces the light transmittance between a plurality of colored regions (printing portion 1711, a plurality of regions 1575) that are the regions where the and a visible region (peek portion 1574) in which the control board stored in the storage portion can be viewed, which is a portion not marked with a predetermined character, and the third information display portion includes: In the thickness direction of the storage section, the distance from a virtual plane obtained by extending the control board in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the storage section is the distance from the virtual plane to the first information display section. are provided differently.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 as in Invention 2, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 is It is associated with the information displayed on the prohibition sticker portion 1730 . Therefore, by confirming the consistency between the information on the seal portion 1720 and the information on the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the inspector can easily confirm fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. In addition, the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 has a distance from a virtual plane in which the control board 1705 is extended in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700. It is provided so as to be different from the distance to the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 . Therefore, the inspector can see that the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 are provided at the same height and on the same plane. The information in the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 are easily visible, and fraudulent actions such as unauthorized replacement of the control board can be easily confirmed.

◆ [Invention 3]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 3 comprises control means (assembly 2P) having a control board (control boards 501, 1705) and storage portions (board cases 1551, 1700) for storing the control boards; A first information display (character 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (character 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means are provided, and in the thickness direction of the storage portion, from the top surface of the storage portion The gist is that the distance to the first information display is different from the distance from the top surface of the storage section to the second information display.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in Invention 3, the characters 1371 and 1372 are on different layers in the thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390. Therefore, the character 1371 of the layer 1381 and the character 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed so that the distance from the top surface of the substrate case 1700 is different. Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, it is easier to remove than, for example, the case where the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification display 523 is provided at positions with different distances from the top surface in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700, that is, in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove than if there is. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed illegally, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700. Therefore, it is possible for the inspector to detect illegal acts. It can be said that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts as well as it is easy to do. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap and are separated from each other in a plan view, the characters 1371 and 1372 appear to be different from each other when the assembly 2P is viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine. The character 1372 can be viewed from a bird's-eye view, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been fraudulent activity with respect to the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ [Invention 4]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 4 comprises control means (assembly 2P) having a control board (control boards 501, 1705) and a storage section (board cases 1551, 1700) for storing the control board; A first information display (characters 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (characters 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means, and a predetermined surface of the control board in the thickness direction of the control board. to the first information display is different from the distance from the predetermined surface of the control board to the second information display.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in Invention 4, the characters 1371 and 1372 are on different layers in the thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390. Therefore, the character 1371 on the layer 1381 and the character 1372 on the layer 1382 are formed on a predetermined surface of the control substrate 1705 (for example, a virtual surface of the control substrate 1705 extending in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction). are formed at different distances from the surface). Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, it is easier to remove than, for example, the case where the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, the identification display 523 is provided at positions with different distances from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. It is relatively difficult to remove. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed illegally, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700. Therefore, it is possible for the inspector to detect illegal acts. It can be said that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts as well as it is easy to do. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap and are separated from each other in a plan view, the characters 1371 and 1372 appear to be different from each other when the assembly 2P is viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine. The character 1372 can be viewed from a bird's-eye view, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been fraudulent activity with respect to the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ [Invention 5]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 5 comprises a control board (control boards 501, 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and the control board so as to allow the plurality of electronic components to be visually recognized. A storage portion (substrate case 1551, 1700) which stores and has optical transparency, and a first information display portion attached to the storage portion for displaying predetermined information (code portions 1572, 1712, information display portions 1573, 1713). ) and a second information display portion (description area 1570), wherein the first information display portion is displayed in a first mode including specific information and a second mode different from the first mode, and the The second information display portion is formed of a material having light transmittance, and includes a plurality of colored regions (printed portions 1571 and 1711, a plurality of regions 1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and the plurality of and a region (peek portion 1574) in which the control board can be visually recognized, between a first colored region of the colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. and

In the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as in invention 5, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are linked to each other. In addition, information containing the same specific information is displayed in different manners. Therefore, it is difficult to tamper with the code portion 1712, and even if the information in the information display portion 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can easily determine whether or not there has been fraud by checking the consistency with the code portion 1712. In addition, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts. Further, in seal portion 1720, peep portion 1574 is formed between code portion 1712 and information display portion 1713 and writing area 1570, so that control board 1705 can be tampered with in the same manner as described above. Since it is possible to easily check whether or not the information has been stolen, the possibility of fraud can be reduced.

◆ [Invention 6]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 6 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a case (1803) enclosing the board and having a first light transmittance, and a board provided on the board for use in the game. storage means (502) for storing stored data; a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means; and a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are printed on the seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced, wherein the seal portion is the first A first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the second colored region having a second light transmittance that is lower than the light transmittance and allows the electronic component to be visually recognized. A viewing portion (1574), which is a portion not marked with a predetermined character between the case portion and the electronic component contained in the case portion, is provided through the second light transmissive property. This is the gist of it.

Since the peeping portion is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component through the peeping portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic component has been tampered with compared to the case where the peeping portion is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced. Also, since a plurality of colored areas are provided, it is possible to write, for example, the inspector's name and the date when the board case was opened. Also, the inspector can write in the area the date when it was confirmed whether or not the control board was tampered with. Also, since the peeping portion is provided between the regions, the regions are more conspicuous than when only the regions are provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced. In addition, since the light transmittance of the seal portion is lower than that of the case portion, it is difficult to forge the seal portion, and it is possible to prevent fraud such as replacing the entire case portion with an illegal substrate. As a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 7-1]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 7-1 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a case part (1803) having light transmittance enclosing the board, and a board provided on the board for use in the game. a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means; and a light-transmissive material provided on the first surface of the case portion. a position display portion (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the case portion and serving as a mark of the position where the seal is attached; and the seal and a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are regions printed on the seal portion and have reduced light transmittance in the seal portion, wherein the seal portion includes a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and the A peep portion (1574), which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a second colored region different from the first colored region and allows the electronic component contained in the case portion to be viewed. The gist is to have

In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification indicia along the position indicia. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces gaming machines, the manufacturer can attach the identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification marks are attached to the same position among a plurality of game machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification marks. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, since the position display portion is formed on the inner surface and the seal portion is attached to the outer surface, the position display portion does not interfere with the seal portion no matter where the seal portion is attached. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display portion, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark attached to the substrate case. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 7-2]
In addition, the gaming machine of invention 7-2 is provided with a board (501) for controlling a game, a case part (1803) having light transmission properties enclosing the board, and a board provided on the board and used for the game. storage means (502) for storing data; a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means; A formed seal portion (1560) and a convex portion and/or a concave portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion on the first surface of the case portion, which serves as a mark for the position where the seal portion is attached. a position display portion (541); and a plurality of colored regions (1575) printed on the seal portion and being regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced, wherein the seal portion includes the plurality of colored The electronic component included in the case part, which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region and a second colored region different from the first colored region, of the region The gist is to have a peeping portion (1574) that allows peeping.

In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification indicia along the position indicia. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces gaming machines, the manufacturer can attach the identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification marks are attached to the same positions among a plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification marks. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

In addition, since the outer surface to which the seal portion is attached is provided with a convex portion and/or a concave portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion and/or a position display portion that is a concave portion, for example, if the substrate case is touched by a hand, the substrate case The peeling of the seal can be prevented as compared with the case where the seal portion is attached to the flat surface of the tape. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, since the seal portion is protected by such a position display portion, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark attached to the substrate case. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 8]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 8 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used in the game, and a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the means, a storage section (1803) having a first light transmittance that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner; A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the unit for displaying specific information; 3 information identification parts (1562, 1596), wherein the first information identification part and the third information identification part are displayed including identification indications that mean at least the same content, and the second information identification part is , a second light transmittance that is lower in light transmittance than the first light transmittance and allows the electronic component to be visually recognized, and has a light transmittance higher than the second light transmittance Predetermined characters are attached between a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are lowered regions and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. and a peeping portion (1574) which is a portion that is not open and allows the user to look into the electronic component stored in the storage portion by means of the second light transmittance.

In this case, the inspector can easily confirm that no fraudulent act has been carried out by checking the storage means and the storage section both having the same identification display. Further, even if the storage means is replaced with another storage means due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can determine whether or not the identification marks attached to the storage means and the storage section are the same. , it is easy to confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 9-1]
A gaming machine (1) of Invention 9-1 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used in the game, provided on the board, a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the storage means, a storage section (1803) having optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner, and the storage section A first information identification portion (1561, 1595) provided in the storage portion for displaying specific information, and a second information identification portion (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage portion for displaying specific information. ), a third information identification portion (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information, and a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the storage portion, the second and a position display portion (541) serving as a mark of the position where the information identification portion is attached, wherein the first information identification portion and the third information identification portion are displayed including identification indications indicating at least the same content, The second information identification part is formed of a material having light transmittance, and includes a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and a first one of the plurality of colored regions. A peep is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a colored region and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and the electronic component stored in the storage section can be viewed. (1574).

◆ [Invention 9-2]
A gaming machine (1) of Invention 9-2 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used in the game, provided on the board, a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the storage means, a storage section (1803) having optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner, and the storage section A first information identification portion (1561, 1595) provided in the storage portion for displaying specific information, and a second information identification portion (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage portion for displaying specific information. ), a third information identification portion (1562, 1598) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information, and a convex portion formed on the outer edge of the second information identification portion on the first surface of the storage portion. and/or a position display portion (541) which is a concave portion and serves as a mark of the position where the second information identification portion is attached, wherein the first information identification portion and the third information identification portion are at least A plurality of colored regions (1575 ) and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion where a predetermined character is not attached, and is stored in the storage portion and a peep portion (1574) that allows peeping into the electronic component.

◆ [Invention 10]
A gaming machine (1) according to a tenth aspect of the invention comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a light-transmitting case (1803) enclosing the board, and data provided on the board and used for the game. a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means; A first seal portion (1561) and a second seal portion (1560) are provided, wherein the second seal portion has a lower light transmittance than the first seal portion and a predetermined degree of visibility of the electronic component. a plurality of colored regions (1575) formed with light transmittance and having a light transmittance lower than the predetermined light transmittance; a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions; It is possible to see through the predetermined light transmittance the electronic component contained in the case portion, which is a portion where the predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and the second colored region different from the first colored region. and a viewing portion (1574).

According to the present invention, since the light transmittance of the second seal portion is lower than the light transmittance of the first seal portion, it becomes difficult to forge the second seal portion. can make it difficult to act. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 11]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 11 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used in the game, and a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the means, a storage section (1803) having optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner; are formed of a light-transmitting material and are provided in the first information identification section (1561, 1595) and the second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) for displaying specific information, and the storage means; , and a third information identification portion (1562, 1596) for displaying specific information, wherein the first information identification portion and the third information identification portion are displayed including identification indications indicating at least the same content. The second information identification section has a lower light transmittance than the first information identification section and is formed with a predetermined light transmittance that allows the electronic component to be visually recognized. A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. and a peeping portion (1574), which is a portion not marked with , and allows the electronic component stored in the storage portion to be viewed with the predetermined light transmittance. This is the gist.

◆ [Invention 12]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 12 comprises a substrate (501), a control unit including electronic components (502, 595) provided on the substrate (501), and a plurality of members (511) containing the control unit. and a case part (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), wherein the electronic component (502, 595), on the member (45P) constituting the mounting surface side, in the thickness direction of the substrate (501), as an identification mark (523) related to the identification marks (521, 522) attached to the control unit The gist is that a first indication (1371) and a second indication (1372) having different distances from the substrate (501) are attached.

In this case, since the identification of the board and the identification of the case are related, if the board is illegally replaced, the identification of the board and the identification of the case will be different. , facilitating the discovery of fraud by inspectors. In addition, the identification mark is provided at positions with different distances from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if the identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the case. This makes it easy to discover fraudulent activity and suppresses the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 13]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 13 comprises a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the mounting surface of the substrate (501), and a plurality of members ( 511) including a case portion (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), and as an identification mark (520) attached to the control means and associated with each other, the substrate (501) A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) are attached so that the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) is different, and the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) is , has a third representation (1375) attached to be the same as the second representation (1372).

In this case, since the identification indications of the control means are related to each other, if the substrate is illegally replaced, the identification indication of the substrate and the identification indication of the case may become different, and the inspector may Behavior is easier to detect. In addition, the identification mark is provided at positions with different distances from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if the identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the case. This makes it easy to discover fraudulent activity and suppresses the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 14]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 14 comprises a substrate (501), a control unit including electronic components (502, 595) provided on the substrate (501), and a plurality of members (511) containing the control unit. and a case portion (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including, the case portion (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) includes an identification mark ( 521, 522) and associated identification (523),
A first indication (1371) and a second indication (1372) are attached so that the positions in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) are different. , 1203, 1203, 1303, 1551), as the identification mark (520) related to the identification mark (523) attached to the substrate, a third mark and a fourth mark attached so as to have different positions in the thickness direction of the substrate. is attached.

In this case, since the identification of the board and the identification of the case are related, if the board is illegally replaced, the identification of the board and the identification of the case will be different. , facilitating the discovery of fraud by inspectors. In addition, the identification mark is provided at positions with different distances from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if the identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the case. This makes it easy to discover fraudulent activity and suppresses the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 15]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 15 comprises a control board (501) for controlling a game, storage means (502) provided on the control board (501) for storing memory contents used for controlling the game, A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the control board (501) different from the storage means (502), and the storage means (502) and the plurality of electronic components (595) are visible and difficult to contact. A light-transmitting storage unit (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) stored in the storage unit (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) is provided to display specific information A first information identification section (523, 1561) and a second information identification section (1560) for displaying specific information provided in the storage means (502) and a third information identification section (522, 1562) for displaying specific information ), wherein the control board (502) has a first region (1900a) and a second region (1900b) different from the first region (1900a), and the second region (1900b) is provided with a fourth information identification section (1902) for displaying specific information, and the first information identification section (523, 1561) and the third information identification section (522, 1562) are at least the same is displayed including identification indications (529, 1595, 1596), the first information identification portion is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the storage means can be visually recognized, and the second information identification portion is transparent a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and a first colored region (1575) among the plurality of colored regions and the first colored region. A peeping portion (1574), which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a second colored region (1575) different from the region and is used for looking into the plurality of electronic components stored in the storage portion. and

In this case, since at least the same identification mark is attached to the first information identification portion of the storage section and the third information identification portion of the storage means, the examiner can distinguish between the storage means and the storage section on which the same identification display is displayed. and can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has taken place. In addition, since the first information identifying portion is attached at an angle that allows the mounting location of the storage means to be visually recognized, for example, even if the storage means is replaced due to fraudulent activity, the storage means and storage portion are attached to the storage means. By judging whether the identification marks are the same, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Further, since the second information identifying portion of the storage portion is provided with a peep portion, the inspector can visually recognize the plurality of electronic components contained in the storage portion through the peep portion. It is possible to confirm whether or not an electronic component has been tampered with. Therefore, an inspector can easily check whether or not a plurality of electronic components contained in the storage section has been tampered with compared to a game machine that does not have a viewing section. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. In such a second information identification section, since predetermined characters can be written in a plurality of colored areas, the predetermined characters can be written in the transparent portion without the colored areas that reduce the light transmittance. It is easier for the inspector to confirm the content of the information in text form, compared to written information. Furthermore, in such a second information identification section, since the transparent viewing section is provided between the plurality of colored regions, compared to a device in which only a plurality of colored regions are arranged side by side, Since the colored area is conspicuous, the inspector can easily check the characters written in the colored area. In this way, it is easy for the inspector to discover fraudulent behavior, and the occurrence of fraudulent behavior can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 16]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 16 comprises a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive storage section (board and a control means (assembly 2P) having a case 1700), and a sealing portion (sealing portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, the sealing portion comprising: A plurality of colored regions (printed portion 1711, a plurality of regions 1575) which are regions with reduced light transmittance, a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions, and a second colored region different from the first colored region and a visible area (peek portion 1574), which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the colored area and where the control board stored in the storage portion can be visually recognized, and the control The means is that some electronic components (electronic components 798) of the plurality of electronic components on the control board are mounted so as to be visible through the visible region, and the some electronic components are The gist is that at least one electronic component (information indicator 1750) among the different electronic components is mounted so as to be visible without going through the visible region.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display device 1750 as in Invention 16, for example, some electronic components such as the information display device 1750 can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the viewing portion 1574. Possible tampering with some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, the information display device 1750 is a member that needs to be easily visually recognized when the game board unit 12P of the game machine 1P is opened.

◆ [Invention 17]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 17 comprises a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmitting storage section (board a control means (assembly 2P) having a case 1700); a seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material; and a predetermined information display portion (information display device 1750) that displays predetermined value information related to the seal portion, and the seal portion includes a plurality of colored regions (print portion 1711, a plurality of areas 1575) and a first colored area among the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area that is different from the first colored area, the portion where a predetermined character is not attached, and a visible area (peeping portion 1574) in which the control board housed in the storage part can be visually recognized, and the control means selects a part of the plurality of electronic components in the control board. (Electronic component 798) is mounted so as to be visible through the visible area, and the predetermined information display part is mounted so as to be visible without going through the visible area. .

According to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display device 1750 as in Invention 17, for example, some electronic components such as the information display device 1750 can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the viewing portion 1574. Possible tampering with some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, the information display device 1750 is a member that needs to be easily visually recognized when the game board unit 12P of the game machine 1P is opened.

◆ [Invention 18]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 18 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a light-transmitting case (1803) enclosing the board, and data provided on the board and used for the game. and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means; A first display (1371) and a second display (1372), a seal portion (1560) provided in the control means and formed of a light-transmissive material, and a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions with reduced transparency, wherein the first display and the second display are arranged from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted. , 2 are displayed at different distances, and the seal portion is provided between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. The gist of the invention is that it has a viewing portion (1574), which is a portion not marked with a predetermined character, and allows viewing of the electronic component contained in the case portion.

In this case, the first display and the second display are provided at predetermined positions of the control means, and the distances from the mounting surface of the substrate to the display of the first and second displays are different, so that the control means cannot be counterfeited. It becomes difficult, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a fraudulent act of replacing the entire control means with a fraudulent base. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The control means includes a substrate, a case portion, storage means, and electronic components. Therefore, for example, the first display may be provided on the substrate and the second display may be provided on the case.

◆ [Invention 19]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 19 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a case part (1803) having light transmittance enclosing the board, and data provided on the board and used for the game. and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, and a light-transmissive material provided in the control means and a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are printed on the seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced, provided in the storage means The first and second indications (1371, 1372) associated with the identification indication (1562) are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the first indication (1371, 1372) is displayed from the surface of the board on which the storage means is mounted. , 2 are displayed at different distances, and the seal portion is provided between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. The gist of the invention is that it has a viewing portion (1574), which is a portion not marked with a predetermined character, and allows viewing of the electronic component contained in the case portion.

◆ [Invention 20]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 20 comprises a substrate (501) for controlling a game, storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in the game, and storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in the game. a control means comprising: a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the means; A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means, and a first information identification section (1561, 1595) provided in the storage section for displaying specific information. and second information identification units (1560, 1572, 1573), and third information identification units (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information, The two displays are different in distance from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted until the first and second displays are displayed, and the first information identification section and the third information identification are different. The second information identification portion is displayed including at least identification indications meaning the same content, and the second information identification portion is formed of a material having light transmittance, and a plurality of areas which are areas with reduced light transmittance. A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a colored region (1575) and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and a peep part (1574) that allows the electronic component stored in the storage part to be looked into.

◆ [Invention 21]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 21 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used in the game, and a board provided on the board for storing data used in the game. a control means comprising: a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the means; , first information identification units (1561, 1595) and second information identification units (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit for displaying specific information; and a third information identification portion (1562, 1596) to be displayed, wherein the first information identification portion and the third information identification portion are displayed including identification indications indicating at least the same content, and the third information The first and second displays (1371, 1372) associated with the identification section are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the first and second displays are displayed from the surface of the board on which the storage means is mounted. The distance to display is different, and the second information identification part is formed of a material having light transmittance, and includes a plurality of colored areas (1575) that are areas with reduced light transmittance, A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being accommodated in the accommodating portion. and a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

◆ [Invention 22]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 22 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used in the game, and a board provided on the board for storing data used in the game. a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the means, a storage section (1803) having optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner; a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) for displaying specific information; and a third information identification section provided in the storage means for displaying specific information. (1562, 1596), wherein the first information identification portion and the third information identification portion are displayed including identification indications meaning at least the same content, and the second information identification portion is the storage The mounting position of the means is displayed at a visible angle, and the second information identification portion is formed of a material having light transmittance, and a plurality of colored areas that are areas with reduced light transmittance. (1575) and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion where a predetermined character is not attached, the storage portion and a viewing portion (1574) that enables viewing of the electronic component housed in the housing.

In this case, since the mounting location of the storage means can be visually recognized with certainty, it is possible to deter tampering with the control board. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 23]
A game machine (1) according to invention 23 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a first case part (1803) containing the board and having light transmittance, and a board provided on the board for use in the game. a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means; a first seal portion (1560) formed of a material having , a prize ball substrate (1811) capable of two-way communication with the substrate, a second case portion (1813) containing the prize ball substrate and having optical transparency, and provided on the prize ball substrate, A second storage means (1812) for storing data to be used, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball substrate and different from the second storage means, and provided on the second case portion, A second seal portion (1816) made of a material having light transmittance, and a plurality of second colored regions printed on the second seal portion, which are regions in which the light transmittance of the second seal portion is reduced. (1817), wherein the first seal portion is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, It has a first peep portion (1574) through which the electronic component contained in the first case portion can be seen, and the second seal portion is separated from the second colored region and the second colored region. It has a second peeping part (1819) which is a part where a predetermined character is not attached between a different fourth colored area and allows the electronic component contained in the second case part to be peeped into. The gist is that the first seal portion and the second seal portion are light transmissive so that the electronic component can be seen through, and that the respective light transmissivities are different.

In this case, since the first seal part related to the control board and the second seal part related to the prize ball board have different light transmittance, it is difficult to forge the first and second seal parts, and the case part is an illegal board. It is possible to make the fraudulent act of replacing with a difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 24]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 24 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a first case part (1803) containing the board and having light transmittance, and a board provided on the board to be used for the game. a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the board and different from the first storage means and mounted through holes on the board; A production board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board, a second case part (1823) having optical transparency that encloses the production board, and is provided on the production board and stores data used for production. and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board and different from the second storage means and surface-mounted on the board. The sealing portion (1560) made of a material having a property includes a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions in which the light transmittance is reduced, and the first colored region and the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions. a viewing portion (1574), which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and allows the user to look into the enclosed electronic component. and attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

In this case, since the handling of the seal portion is different between the first case portion of the control board and the second case portion of the effect board, it becomes difficult to forge the first and second case portions and the seal portion, and the case portion is illegally used. It is possible to make the fraudulent act of replacing the board difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 25]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 25 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a first case part (1803) containing the board and having light transmittance, and a board provided on the board and used for the game. and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means, and capable of two-way communication with the substrate. A prize ball substrate (1811), a second case portion (1813) having optical transparency that encloses the prize ball substrate, and a second case portion (1813) that is provided on the prize ball substrate and stores data used for the prize balls. 2 storage means (1812) and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball board and different from the second storage means; a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided in the first case portion, a first seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material provided in the first case portion, and the first seal portion A plurality of first colored regions (1575), which are regions in which the light transmittance is reduced in the first seal portion, and the second case portion, and are formed of a material having light transmittance. a second seal portion (1816); and a plurality of second colored regions (1817), which are regions printed on the second seal portion and having reduced light transmittance in the second seal portion; The first display and the second display have different distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted until the first and second displays are displayed, and the first seal portion is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, the electronic component included in the first case portion has a first peep portion (1574) through which a user can look into the second seal portion, and the second seal portion is provided between the second colored area and a fourth colored area different from the second colored area, and a predetermined character is not marked, and has a second peep portion (1819) through which the electronic component contained in the second case portion can be seen, and the first seal portion and the second seal are provided. The gist of the part is that the electronic components are transparent to be seen through, and that the respective optical transparency is different.

◆ [Invention 26]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 26 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a first case part (1803) containing the board and having light transmittance, provided on the board, and used for the game. and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means, and capable of two-way communication with the substrate. A prize ball substrate (1811), a second case portion (1813) having optical transparency that encloses the prize ball substrate, and a second case portion (1813) that is provided on the prize ball substrate and stores data used for the prize balls. 2 storage means (1812); a prize ball means provided on the prize ball substrate and having a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the second storage means; A first seal portion (1560) formed of a material having transparency, and a plurality of first colored regions ( 1575), a second seal portion (1816) provided in the second case portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, and printed on the second seal portion to transmit light in the second seal portion. a plurality of second colored regions (1817) which are regions with a reduced The first and second displays are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the distances from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different. A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and the electronic component included in the first case portion is viewed. and the second sealing part has a predetermined character between the second colored area and a fourth colored area different from the second colored area. It has a second peep portion (1819) which is a portion that is not covered and allows the electronic component contained in the second case portion to be seen, and the first seal portion and the second seal portion are 4. The gist of the present invention is that the electronic component is transparent to be seen through, and that the respective optical transparency is different.

◆ [Invention 27]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 27 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a first case part (1803) containing the board and having light transmittance, provided on the board, and used for the game. and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate, different from the first storage means, and mounted through holes on the substrate. a control means having, a production board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board, a second case part (1823) having optical transparency enclosing the production board, and provided in the production board, A second storage means (1822) for storing data to be used, and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board and different from the second storage means and surface-mounted on the effect board. and a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations of the control means, wherein the first display and the second display are: A sealing portion (1560) formed of a light-transmissive material, wherein the distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different from each other. is between a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions with reduced light transmittance, a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions, and a second colored region different from the first colored region and a peeping portion (1574) which is a portion not marked with a predetermined character and allows peeping into the electronic component contained therein, and is not attached to the second case portion. The gist is that it is attached to the first case portion.

◆ [Invention 28]
A game machine (1) according to invention 28 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game, a first case part (1803) enclosing the board and having light transmittance, provided on the board, and used for the game. and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate, different from the first storage means, and mounted through holes on the substrate. a control means having, a production board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board, a second case part (1823) having optical transparency enclosing the production board, and provided in the production board, A second storage means (1822) for storing memory to be used, and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board and different from the second storage means and surface-mounted on the board. and displaying the first and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided in the first storage means at different predetermined locations of the control means, and , the seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmissive material, the distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different from each other, , between a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region and a peep portion (1574) which is a portion not marked with a predetermined character and which allows a peep into the contained electronic component, and which is not attached to the second case portion. The gist is that it is attached to one case portion.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition, and based on the determination result, the variable performance of the performance symbol is performed. It is common to execute it on an image display device. In such a game machine, there are a plurality of types of variation patterns for the variable performance of the performance symbols, and selection is made from among the plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result, and the variation performance of the performance symbols in the selected variation pattern is displayed as an image. It was displayed on a display device (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is room for improvement in the aspect of the variable effect of the effect symbols, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be lowered.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) During the second period (during the main stop display, during the derived display), the stop effect can be executed, and the first specific effect (normal fluctuation, normal reach effect, etc.) can be performed. A case of executing a first variable performance to be performed, and a case of executing a second variable performance to perform a second specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance, etc.) with a higher expectation of the special game than the first specific performance. Then, it is possible to control the execution time of the first period to be different, and during the first period in the case of executing the second fluctuation production, the first production in a predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggestion Effect, predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size in FIGS. 141(a), 141(e), etc.), and a second effect different from the first effect (any variation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e) 141 (c) (f), the production pattern 70a shown in FIGS. The first reservation information to be displayed (first special reservation number, second special reservation number), and the second reservation information (first reservation icon, second hold icon), and when the reserved memory increases during execution of the second specific effect, the first memory number (for example, one) in the first reservation information to the second memory number (for example, two), but the increase display from the first memory number in the second hold information to the second memory number is performed under a predetermined condition (SP reach ( SPSP reach (end of performance) is not executed until establishment, and when the signal at the start of the variable performance is received in the recognizable display mode and the performance pattern is displaced from the predetermined position, the performance pattern. is variably displayed from the predetermined position (see FIG. 98(h), etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) In the second period (during the main stop display, during the derived display), the stop effect can be executed, and the degree of expectation is improved step by step in the variable effect. A predetermined effect (pseudo continuous effect) can be executed, and the execution time of the first period differs between when the predetermined effect is executed and when the predetermined effect is not executed, and the predetermined effect is executed. During the first period in the case of execution, the first production in a predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production pattern 70a, the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e) is reduced 141(c) and (f), and a second effect different from the first effect (any Fluctuation end suggestion effect, predetermined operation of the effect pattern 70a, effect that the effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 1st reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in the first display mode, and the above It is possible to display second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) that displays the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and the start of fluctuation of the production pattern causes the 1st pending information is 1st Starting to display a decrease from a stored number of 1 (for example, 2) to a second stored number (for example, 1), and the second pending information decreases from the first stored number to the second stored number. Before the display is completed, a third effect (reduced display without scrolling (see FIG. 42(b))) different from the first effect and the second effect can be executed, and the effect symbol is in the recognizable display mode, and when the variable performance start signal is received when the performance pattern is in the stop display mode. , the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the same manner (see FIGS. 98(d) and (h)). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) A second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) that can be a main stop display, derived display), and a stop effect can be executed, and during one fluctuation of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is A predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) that becomes the recognizable display mode can be executed a plurality of times. During the first period in which the execution time is likely to be long, the performance symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in the mode of executing the special game, and the final recognizable display mode in the predetermined performance is maintained in a predetermined mode. 1st effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e), effects in FIGS. 141 (c) and (f) and a second effect that is different from the first effect (such as an effect in which the symbol 70a returns to its normal size) (any variation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect symbol 70a, FIG. 141 141(a) and 141(e) in which the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in a reduced size, and in FIGS. There is, first reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in the first display mode, and a second display mode different from the first display mode for the reservation memory displayed by It is possible to display the second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon), and the first pending information is stored from the first number (for example, two) by the start of fluctuation of the production pattern Decrease display to the second stored number (for example, 1) is started, and before the second pending information for which the variable effect is started completes the change display to the execution information (variable icon), the first A third effect (reduced display without scrolling (see FIG. 42(b))) different from the effect and the second effect can be executed, and the effect pattern is in the recognizable display mode. When the start time signal of the variable effect is received, the variable display is performed after ending the recognizable display mode of the effect pattern (see FIG. 98(h), etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is satisfied, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) a second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) in which a stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is a mode for executing the special game. A first mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode (combination indicating a loss) different from the above, and a second mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of executing the special game (combination indicating a big win). , and when the stop display mode is the second mode, the first effect of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, effect A predetermined action of the design 70a, an effect in which the performance design 70a is reduced in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and a performance design 70a in FIGS. production, etc.), and a second production in a mode different from the first production (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production design 70a, and the production design 70a in FIGS. 141 (c) (f), the effect that the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. Reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) and second reservation information (first reservation icon, second Hold icon) and . The display image can be updated on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and the second suspension in which the variable effect is started is the case where the storage of the suspension is reduced by one. When the reserved memory increases during display of change to execution information (variable icon) of information, the first reserved information is displayed to increase even before the frame update timing at which the display of change is completed. It is controllable to start (see FIG. 42), and when a signal at the start of the variable production is received when the production pattern, which is the recognizable display mode in the variable production, is deviated from a predetermined position, the Along with the start of the variable performance, the performance symbols are variably displayed from the predetermined position (see FIG. 98(h), etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) a second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) in which a stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is a mode for executing the special game. A first mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode (combination indicating a loss) different from the above, and a second mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of executing the special game (combination indicating a big win). , and when the stop display mode is the first mode, the first effect of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, effect A predetermined action of the design 70a, an effect in which the performance design 70a is reduced in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and a performance design 70a in FIGS. production, etc.), and a second production in a mode different from the first production (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production design 70a, and the production design 70a in FIGS. 141(c) and (f) are displayed in a state where the production pattern 70a has returned to its normal size, etc.) are difficult to execute, and the first display of the suspended memory in the first display mode Reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) and second reservation information (first reservation icon, second Hold icon) and . The display image can be updated on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and when the reserved memory increases during the variable display of the effect symbols, the second reserved information is increased and displayed. can be controlled so that the timing at which the increase display of the first reserved information is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the display is completed (see FIG. 40), and the effect pattern is the recognition When the signal at the start of the variable production is received when the display pattern is in the possible display mode, and when the signal at the start of the variable production is received when the production pattern is in the stop display mode, the above-mentioned The variable display of the production pattern is started in a similar manner (see FIGS. 98(d), (h), etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, the first determination information or the second determination information is acquired by the establishment of the first start condition or the establishment of the second start condition, and the game is played based on the determination information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first reservation storage (special storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second judgment information as a second reserved memory (special 2 reserved memory); and display means ( In a game machine including a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.), It is controllable to a second state (a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state, and the production control means provides a production pattern (production pattern 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) A stop effect can be executed during a second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) in which a main stop display, derived display can be performed, and in the first state and the second state, 1st reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) that can be controlled so that the production mode during the first period is different and displays the reservation memory in the first display mode; It is possible to display second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) that displays the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and in the second state, the first pending When the memory increases, the first number of memories in the first pending information (e.g., one) to the second number of memories (e.g., two) to perform an increased display, but in the second pending information It is possible to limit the increase display from the first memory number to the second memory number (see FIG. 46), and when the production pattern is in the recognizable display mode, the variable production When the start time signal is received, the recognizable display mode of the production pattern is terminated. 98(h), etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) The second period (during the main stop display, the derived display) can be performed (during the main stop display, during the derived display), and the stop effect can be executed, and the first specific effect (normal fluctuation, normal reach effect, etc.) and when executing a second variable effect in which a second specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, etc.) with a higher expectation of the special game than the first specific effect is executed. , it is possible to control the execution time of the first period to be different, and during the first period when the second variable effect is executed, the first effect in a predetermined mode (any variation end Suggestive effect, predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in FIGS. ), and a second effect that is different from the first effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, a predetermined operation of the effect pattern 70a, and the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (a) (e) is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect that the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 1st reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) displayed by and second reservation information (first Hold icon, second hold can be displayed, and according to the decrease in the reserved memory, the second reserved information can be shifted and displayed, and one can be displayed as execution information (variable icon), and the second When the reserved memory increases during the execution of the specific effect, the increase display from the first memory number in the first reservation information to the second memory number is executed, but the first memory number in the second reservation information The increase display from the stored number (for example, 1) to the second stored number (for example, 2) is executed until a predetermined condition (end of SP reach (SPSP reach) effect) is satisfied in the first period. A signal at the start of the variable performance in which the holding memory reaches the predetermined number while the second holding information is displayed in a specific number (for example, 3) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, 1). is received, the execution information is erased, the variable effect is started, and the second reservation information corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the second reservation information is not shifted and displayed. The second pending information corresponding to a predetermined number is displayed in a shift manner, and one of the shift-displayed items is displayed as the execution information (see FIG. 97). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) In the second period (during the main stop display, during the derived display), the stop effect can be executed, and the degree of expectation is improved step by step in the variable effect. A predetermined effect (pseudo continuous effect) can be executed, and the execution time of the first period differs between when the predetermined effect is executed and when the predetermined effect is not executed, and the predetermined effect is executed. During the first period in the case of execution, the first production in a predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production pattern 70a, the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e) is reduced 141(c) and (f), and a second effect different from the first effect (any Fluctuation end suggestion effect, predetermined operation of the effect pattern 70a, effect that the effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 1st reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in the first display mode, and the above It is possible to display second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) that displays the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and according to the decrease in the pending memory, Shift secondary hold information It is possible to display and display one as execution information (variation icon), and by the start of variation of the production pattern, the first reservation information changes from the first storage number (for example, two) to the second Before the display of decreasing the number of memories (for example, one) is started, and the second pending information completes the display of decreasing the number of memories from the first number of memories to the second number of memories, the first effect and the second effect are displayed. A third effect (reduced display in a non-scrolled state (see FIG. 42(b))) that is different from the 2 effects can be executed, and a specific number (for example, , 3 pieces)), when a signal is received at the start of the variable production that the holding memory reaches the predetermined number, the execution information is erased and the variable production is started. , the predetermined number of the second pending information and the execution information are displayed after displaying the second pending information whose number is one less than the specific number (see FIG. 97). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is satisfied, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) A second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) that can be a main stop display, derived display), and a stop effect can be executed, and during one fluctuation of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is A predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) that becomes the recognizable display mode can be executed a plurality of times. During the first period in which the execution time is likely to be long, the performance symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in the mode of executing the special game, and the final recognizable display mode in the predetermined performance is maintained in a predetermined mode. 1st effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e), effects in FIGS. 141 (c) and (f) and a second effect that is different from the first effect (such as an effect in which the symbol 70a returns to its normal size) (any variation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect symbol 70a, FIG. 141 141(a) and 141(e) in which the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in a reduced size, and in FIGS. There is, first reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in the first display mode, and a second display mode different from the first display mode for the reservation memory displayed by and the second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon), and the second pending information is shifted and displayed according to the decrease in the pending storage, and one is executed information (variable icon ), and due to the start of variation of the production pattern, the first reservation information is reduced from the first memory number (for example, 2 pieces) to the second memory number (for example, 1 piece). is started, and before the second pending information for which the variable effect is started completes the change display to the execution information (variable icon), a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (Reduced display (see FIG. 42(b)) in a non-scrolled state) can be executed, and the second hold information of a specific number (eg, 3) that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, 1) During the display of , when the pending memory receives the signal at the start of the variable production that becomes the predetermined number, the execution information is erased, the variable production is started, and the number is one less than the specific number. While displaying the predetermined number of the first reserved information without displaying the first reserved information of, after displaying the second reserved information of the number one less than the specific number, the predetermined number of the The second pending information and the execution information are displayed (see FIG. 97). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) a second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) in which a stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is a mode for executing the special game. A first mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode (combination indicating a loss) different from the above, and a second mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of executing the special game (combination indicating a big win). , and when the stop display mode is the second mode, the first effect of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, effect A predetermined action of the design 70a, an effect in which the performance design 70a is reduced in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and a performance design 70a in FIGS. production, etc.), and a second production in a mode different from the first production (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production design 70a, and the production design 70a in FIGS. 141 (c) and (f), the effect of displaying the effect symbol 70a returning to the normal size, etc.) are easily executed, and the first display of the suspended memory in the first display mode. Reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) and second reservation information (first reservation icon, second hold icon) and It is possible to shift display the second pending information according to the decrease of the pending storage and display one as execution information (variable icon), and each time a predetermined frame update timing comes. The display image can be updated on the display means, and the pending memory is reduced by one, and the pending memory is displayed during the change display to the execution information of the second pending information in which the variable effect is started. In the case of an increase, the first pending information can be controlled to start increasing display (see FIG. 42) even before the frame update timing that completes the changing display, and a predetermined number (for example , 1 piece) while the second holding information is displayed with a specific number (for example, 4 pieces), when the holding memory receives the signal at the start of the variable production that becomes the predetermined number, the Along with erasing the execution information, the variable performance is started, and the predetermined number of the second reservation information and the execution information are displayed without displaying the second reservation information of the number one less than the specific number. (See FIG. 97). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when a starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) a second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) in which a stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is a mode for executing the special game. A first mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode (combination indicating a loss) different from the above, and a second mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of executing the special game (combination indicating a big win). , and when the stop display mode is the first mode, the first effect of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, effect A predetermined action of the design 70a, an effect in which the performance design 70a is reduced in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and a performance design 70a in FIGS. production, etc.), and a second production in a mode different from the first production (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production design 70a, and the production design 70a in FIGS. 141(c) and (f) are displayed in a state where the production pattern 70a has returned to its normal size, etc.) are difficult to execute, and the first display of the suspended memory in the first display mode Reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) and second reservation information (first reservation icon, second hold icon) and It is possible to shift display the second pending information according to the decrease of the pending storage and display one as execution information (variable icon), and each time a predetermined frame update timing comes. It is possible to update the display image on the display means, and when the reserved memory increases during the variable display of the effect symbols, the second reserved information is earlier than the frame update timing at which the second reserved information completes the increased display. It is possible to control so that the timing at which 1 pending information completes the increase display is earlier (see FIG. 40), and a specific number (for example, 4) that is 3 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) ) during the display of the second suspension information, when the suspension memory receives the signal at the start of the variable performance that the predetermined number is reached, the execution information is erased, the variable performance is started, and the specified Displaying the second pending information in a number less than the specific number by two without displaying the second pending information in a number one less than the number, and then displaying the second pending information in the predetermined number and the Execution information is displayed (see FIG. 97). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, first determination information or second determination information is acquired when a first start condition is satisfied or a second start condition is satisfied, and a game is played based on the determination information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first reservation storage (special storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second judgment information as a second reserved memory (special 2 reserved memory); and display means ( In a game machine including a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.), It is controllable to a second state (a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state, and the production control means provides a production pattern (production pattern 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) A stop effect can be executed during a second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) in which a main stop display, derived display can be performed, and in the first state and the second state, 1st reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) that can be controlled so that the production mode during the first period is different and displays the reservation memory in the first display mode; It is possible to display second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) that displays the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and according to the decrease in the pending memory, It is possible to shift display the second pending information and display one as execution information (variable icon), and when the first pending memory increases in the second state, the first from the stored number (for example, 1) to the second stored number (for example, 12), but the increase from the first stored number to the second stored number in the second pending information It is possible to limit the display of increments (see FIG. 46) to a predetermined number (e.g. , 1 piece), while the second holding information is displayed in a specific number (for example, 4 pieces), when the holding memory receives the signal at the start of the variable production that becomes the predetermined number, the While erasing the execution information, starting the variable effect, and displaying the predetermined number of the first reserved information without displaying the first reserved information of the number less than the specific number by two, Displaying the second pending information in a number less than the specific number by two without displaying the second pending information in a number one less than the number, and then displaying the second pending information in the predetermined number and the Execution information is displayed (see FIG. 97). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◇ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when a starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.) Detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting and display means (image display devices 70, 71) in accordance with the signal from the main control means. In a game machine comprising a possible effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, The effect control means can be a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which the effect pattern (effect pattern 70a) is recognizable in the variable effect and it is recognizable that the variable display is being performed. 1 period (for example, the period during which all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (the period during which the temporary stop is displayed before the main stop display, the period during which the temporary stop is displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect), when the reach is established, the normal reach During production, etc.) and a second period (during main stop display, during derived display) during which the production pattern can be stopped and displayed (main stop display, derived display). It is possible, and a case where a first variation production that performs a first specific production (normal fluctuation, normal reach production, etc.) is executed, and a second specific production (SP reach production) with a higher expectation of the special game than the first specific production , SPSP ready-to-win effect, etc.), the execution time of the first period can be controlled to be different, and during the first period when executing the second variable effect , the first effect of a predetermined mode (any of the fluctuation end suggesting effect, the predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, the effect in which the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e) is displayed in reduced size, the ) (e.g., an effect in which the effect pattern 70a in (f) returns to its normal size), and a second effect different from the first effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, the effect of the effect symbol 70a 141 (a) (e), the production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, and the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (c) (f) is displayed in a normal size. ), and can be executed, and the first reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in the first display mode, and the reservation memory in the first Second suspension information (first suspension icon, second suspension icon) displayed in a second display mode different from the display mode can be displayed, and the suspension memory is increased during execution of the second specific effect. In the case, the first storage number (eg, 1) in the first pending information to the second storage number (eg, 2) is increased display, but the first storage number in the second pending information The increase display from the stored number to the second stored number is not executed until a predetermined condition (end of SP reach (SPSP reach) effect) is satisfied in the first period, and power supply to the game machine is started. When the main control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.). I have to. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) In the second period (during the main stop display, during the derived display), the stop effect can be executed, and the degree of expectation is improved step by step in the variable effect. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) and a specific effect (SP reach) that suggests that the special game is likely to be executed. The execution time of the first period differs between when the effect is not executed, and during the first period when the predetermined effect is executed, the first effect of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggestion Effect, predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size in FIGS. 141(a), 141(e), etc.), and a second effect different from the first effect (any variation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e) 141 (c) (f), the production pattern 70a shown in FIGS. The first reservation information to be displayed (first special reservation number, second special reservation number), and the second reservation information (first reservation icon, second pending icon) and can be displayed, and by the start of fluctuation of the production pattern, the first reservation information is reduced from the first memory number (for example, 2 pieces) to the second memory number (for example, 1 piece). is started, and before the second pending information completes the decrease display from the first stored number to the second stored number, a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect ( Reduced display (see FIG. 42(b)) in a non-scrolled state can be executed, and during execution of the specific effect, the second pending information is set to a non-display state, and when the specific effect ends, the The return display of the second holding information is executed, and the return display of the second holding information is executed when the specific performance ends before the execution period of the increase display of the second holding information during execution of the variable performance. The period is set to be shorter (see FIGS. 42, 44, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, first determination information or second determination information is acquired when a first start condition is satisfied or a second start condition is satisfied, and a game is played based on the determination information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first reservation storage (special storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second judgment information as a second reserved memory (special 2 reserved memory); and display means ( In a game machine including a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.), It is controllable to a second state (a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state, and the production control means provides a production pattern (production pattern 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) A second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) that can be a main stop display, derived display), and a stop effect can be executed, and during one fluctuation of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is A predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) that becomes the recognizable display mode can be executed a plurality of times. During the first period in which the execution time is likely to be long, the performance symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in the mode of executing the special game, and the final recognizable display mode in the predetermined performance is maintained in a predetermined mode. 1st effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e), effects in FIGS. 141 (c) and (f) and a second effect that is different from the first effect (such as an effect in which the symbol 70a returns to its normal size) (any variation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect symbol 70a, FIG. 141 Production pattern 70a in (a) and (e) is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect that the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 1st reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) displayed by and second reservation information (first A pending icon, a second pending icon) can be displayed, and the first pending information changes from the first stored number (for example, 2 pieces) to the second stored number (for example, 1), and before the second pending information, in which the variable effect is started, completes the change display to the execution information, the second effect in a mode different from the first effect and the second effect is displayed. 3 effects (reduced display in a non-scrolled state (see FIG. 42(b))) can be executed, and in the second state, the second reserved information based on the first reserved storage is set to a non-display state, and the When transitioning from the second state to the first state, performing the return display of the second reserved information based on the first reserved memory, and the second reserved information based on the first reserved memory in the first state. The execution period of the return display of the second hold information based on the first hold memory when shifting from the second state to the first state is shorter than the execution period of the increase display of the (Refer to FIG. 42, FIG. 46, FIG. 47, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems, the first determination information or the second determination information is acquired by the establishment of the first start condition or the establishment of the second start condition, and the game is played based on the determination information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first reservation storage (special storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second judgment information as a second reservation memory (special 2 reservation memory), and determining the judgment information before the special game judgment. A gaming machine comprising prior determination means and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variable effect in display means (image display devices 70, 71) in accordance with a signal from the main control means , A first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.) and a second state (time-saving game state, high-probability game state, etc.) more advantageous to the player than the first state. In the variable performance, the performance control means can make the performance pattern (the performance pattern 70a) recognizable, and can be in a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed. A first period (for example, the period during which all the production symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous production), when ready-to-win is established , during normal reach production, etc.), and a second period (during main stop display, during derived display) in which the production pattern can be stopped and displayed (main stop display, derived display). can be executed, and the stop display mode includes a first mode in which the effect symbols are stop-displayed in a mode (combination indicating a failure) different from the mode in which the special game is performed, and a mode in which the special game is performed. There is a second mode in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in (a combination indicating a big win), and when the stop display mode is the second mode, the first period is longer than in the first mode. In the first production of a predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined action of the production pattern 70a, a production in which the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e) is displayed in a reduced size, FIG. 141 (c) (f) production pattern 70a returned to the normal size, etc.) and a second production in a mode different from the first production (any fluctuation end suggesting production, predetermined production pattern 70a operation, production pattern 7 in Figure 141 (a) (e) 0a is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect that the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 1st reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) displayed by and second reservation information (first pending icon, second pending icon), can be displayed, the display image can be updated on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and the pending storage is reduced by one, If the pending memory increases during the change display to the execution information (variable icon) of the second hold information for which the variable effect is started, before the frame update timing at which the change display is completed. Also, the first reservation information can be controlled to start increasing display (see FIG. 42), and based on the determination of the prior determination means, a look-ahead effect that suggests the possibility of executing the special game ( icon change effect, continuous notice effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect), lamp change effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the first state, the first hold information based on the first determination information is displayed, and it is possible to execute the pre-reading effect based on the determination of the first determination information by the preliminary determination means, and in the second state, the first While the pending information is displayed, the prefetch effect based on the determination of the first determination information by the prior determination means is not executed (see FIGS. 8, 46, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the start condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) a second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) in which a stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is a mode for executing the special game. A first mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode (combination indicating a loss) different from the above, and a second mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of executing the special game (combination indicating a big win). , and when the stop display mode is the first mode, the first effect of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, effect A predetermined action of the design 70a, an effect in which the performance design 70a is reduced in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and a performance design 70a in FIGS. production, etc.), and a second production in a mode different from the first production (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production design 70a, and the production design 70a in FIGS. 141(c) and (f) are displayed in a state where the production pattern 70a has returned to its normal size, etc.) are difficult to execute, and the first display of the suspended memory in the first display mode Reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) and second reservation information (first reservation icon, second hold icon) and The display is possible, and the display image can be updated on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and when the reserved memory increases during the variable display of the effect symbols, the second reserved information is increased and displayed. can be controlled so that the timing at which the increase display of the first hold information is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the display is completed (see FIG. 40), and the variable effect and the special The execution period of the increased display of the second reserved information during the execution of the variable presentation is longer than the execution period of the increased display of the second reserved information during the customer waiting state in which the game is not executed ( 37, 38 and 40). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, first determination information or second determination information is acquired when a first start condition is satisfied or a second start condition is satisfied, and a game is played based on the determination information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first reservation storage (special storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second judgment information as a second reserved memory (special 2 reserved memory), and a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetic anomaly, radio wave anomaly, etc.) Detecting means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) and display means (image display devices 70, 71) in response to signals from the main control means. In a gaming machine comprising an effect control means (effect control board 130), a first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.) and a second state ( time-saving gaming state, high-probability gaming state, etc.), and the main control means performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and the production control The means is a first period in which the production pattern (production pattern 70a) is recognizable in the variable production, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed. (For example, the period during which all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous production), when reach is established, during normal reach production, etc. ), and a second period (during main stop display, during derived display) during which the stop display mode (main stop display, derived display) in which the effect symbol is stop-displayed can be executed. In the first state and the second state, it is possible to control the effect mode during the first period to be different, and the first suspension information (the first Special figure pending number, second special figure pending number) and second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) for displaying the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode, can be displayed, and when the first reserved memory increases in the second state, the first memory number (e.g., one) to the second memory number (e.g., two) in the first reservation information , but the second in the second pending information It is possible to limit the increase display from the stored number of 1 to the second stored number (see FIG. 46), and the main control means and the detection means are disconnected while power is being supplied to the gaming machine. When a state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) occurs, it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, first determination information or second determination information is acquired when a first start condition is satisfied or a second start condition is satisfied, and a game is played based on the determination information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first reservation storage (special storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second judgment information as a second reservation memory (special 2 reservation memory), and determining the judgment information before the special game judgment. A gaming machine comprising prior determination means and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variable effect in display means (image display devices 70, 71) in accordance with a signal from the main control means , A first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.) and a second state (time-saving game state, high-probability game state, etc.) more advantageous to the player than the first state. In the variable performance, the performance control means can make the performance pattern (the performance pattern 70a) recognizable, and can be in a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed. A first period (for example, the period during which all the production symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous production), when ready-to-win is established , during normal reach production, etc.), and a second period (during main stop display, during derived display) in which the production pattern can be stopped and displayed (main stop display, derived display). can be executed, and a case of executing a first variation production that performs a first specific production (normal fluctuation, normal reach production, etc.), and a second specific production (SP It is possible to control the execution time of the first period to be different from the case of executing the second fluctuation production in which the reach production, the SPSP reach production, etc.) is executed, and the first period when executing the second fluctuation production During the period, the first production in a predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a prescribed action of the production pattern 70a, the production in which the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e) is reduced and displayed, (c) and (f), such as an effect in which the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size), and a second effect different from the first effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, effect pattern Predetermined operation of 70a, FIG. 141 (a) (e) Effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, effect in which the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. First reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) displayed in the first display mode, and second reservation in which the reservation memory is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode Information (first pending icon, second pending icon) can be displayed, and when the pending memory increases during execution of the second specific effect, the first storage number in the first pending information (for example , 1) to a second stored number (for example, 2), but the incremented display from the first stored number to the second stored number in the second hold information is the A look-ahead effect (not executed until a predetermined condition (end of SP reach (SPSP reach) effect) is established in the first period, and suggests the possibility of executing the special game based on the determination of the prior determination means ( icon change effect, continuous notice effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect), lamp change effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the first state, the first hold information based on the first determination information is displayed, and it is possible to execute the pre-reading effect based on the determination of the first determination information by the preliminary determination means, and in the second state, the first While the pending information is displayed, the prefetch effect based on the determination of the first determination information by the prior determination means is not executed (see FIGS. 8, 46, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when a starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) In the second period (during the main stop display, during the derived display), the stop effect can be executed, and the degree of expectation is improved step by step in the variable effect. A predetermined effect (pseudo continuous effect) can be executed, and the execution time of the first period differs between when the predetermined effect is executed and when the predetermined effect is not executed, and the predetermined effect is executed. During the first period in the case of execution, the first production in a predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production pattern 70a, the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e) is reduced 141(c) and (f), and a second effect different from the first effect (any Fluctuation end suggestion effect, predetermined operation of the effect pattern 70a, effect that the effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 1st reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in the first display mode, and the above It is possible to display second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) that displays the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and the start of fluctuation of the production pattern causes the The first pending information is Start decreasing display from a first stored number (for example, 2) to a second stored number (for example, 1), and the second pending information changes from the first stored number to the second stored number Before completing the reduced display, a third effect (reduced display without scrolling (see FIG. 42(b))) different from the first effect and the second effect can be executed, and the variable The execution period of the increased display of the second pending information during the execution of the variable performance is longer than the execution period of the increased display of the second pending information during the customer waiting state in which the performance and the special game are not executed. (see FIGS. 37, 38 and 40). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.) Detecting means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) and display means (image display devices 70, 71) in response to signals from the main control means. In a gaming machine comprising an effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and controls the effect. The means is a first period in which the performance pattern (the performance pattern 70a) is recognizable in the variable performance, and a recognizable display state (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed. (For example, the period during which all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous production), when reach is established, during normal reach production, etc. ), and a second period (during main stop display, during derived display) during which the stop display mode (main stop display, derived display) in which the effect symbol is stop-displayed can be executed. There, during one fluctuation of the production pattern, it is possible to execute a predetermined production (pseudo continuous production) in which the production pattern is in the recognizable display mode a plurality of times, and when executing the prescribed production, the predetermined The execution time of the first period tends to be longer than when the effect is not executed, and the effect symbol is easily stopped and displayed in the mode of executing the special game, and the last recognizable effect in the predetermined effect. During the first period, which is the display mode, the first production in a predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting production, a predetermined operation of the production pattern 70a, the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e) is reduced 141(c) and (f), and a second effect different from the first effect (any 141(a)(e), the production pattern 70a shown in FIGS. 141(c)(f), and the production pattern 70a shown in FIGS. 1st suspension information (1st special figure suspension number, 2nd special figure suspension number), and second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) that displays the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and can display the production pattern. By the start of fluctuation, the first reserved information starts to be displayed decreasingly from the first stored number (for example, 2 pieces) to the second stored number (for example, 1 piece), and the variable effect is started. Before the change display of the pending information to the execution information (variable icon) is completed, a third effect (reduced display in a non-scrolled state) different from the first effect and the second effect (Fig. 42(b) )), and when the main control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification , magnetic anomaly notification, radio anomaly notification, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problems, first determination information or second determination information is acquired when a first start condition is satisfied or a second start condition is satisfied, and a game is played based on the determination information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first reservation storage (special storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second judgment information as a second reserved memory (special 2 reserved memory); and display means ( In a game machine including a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.), It is controllable to a second state (a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state, and the production control means provides a production pattern (production pattern 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) It is possible to execute a stop effect by a second period in which it is possible to become a fixed stop), and the stop display mode is a mode (combination indicating a loss) different from the mode of executing the special game. is stopped and displayed, and a second mode in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode of executing the special game (a combination indicating a big win), and the stop display mode is the second mode. In the case, compared to the case of the first mode, in the first period, the first effect of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, the predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, FIG. 141 (a) (e ) in which the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in a reduced size, and in FIGS. Second effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, predetermined operation of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e), effect patterns in FIGS. 70a is displayed with it returned to its normal size. and the first reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in the first display mode, and the reservation memory in the first Second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) displayed in a second display mode different from the display mode can be displayed, and a display image is displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. can be updated, and the suspended memory is reduced by one, and the suspended memory is increased during the change display to the execution information (variable icon) of the second suspended information where the variable effect is started. In this case, the first pending information can be controlled to start increasing display even before the frame update timing that completes the changing display (see FIG. 42), and in the second state, When the second pending information based on the first pending memory is put in a non-display state and the state is changed from the second state to the first state, the return display of the second pending information based on the first pending memory is executed. and based on the first reserved memory when transitioning from the second state to the first state than the execution period of the increased display of the second reserved information based on the first reserved memory in the first state The execution period of the return display of the second hold information is made shorter (see FIGS. 42, 46, 47, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. is recognizable, and a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed (for example, all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped Period (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), when reach is established, during normal reach effect, etc.) It is possible to execute a stop effect during a second period (during main stop display, during derivation display) that can be a main stop display, derived display), and the possibility of executing the special game in the variable effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP reach) that suggests that the value is high, and the stop display mode is a mode (combination indicating a loss) different from the mode of executing the special game. There are a first mode and a second mode in which the effect symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of executing the special game (a combination indicating a big win), and when the stop display mode is the first mode, the second mode Compared to the case of two modes, in the first period, the first production of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting production, the predetermined operation of the production pattern 70a, the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (a) (e) 141(c) and (f), and a second effect different from the first effect (any 141(a)(e), the production pattern 70a shown in FIGS. 141(c)(f) is normal size. Effect displayed in the state returned to), and the first reservation information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) that is difficult to execute and displays the reservation memory in the first display mode, said reserved memory is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) can be displayed, and the display can be performed each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. The display image can be updated by the means, and when the reserved memory increases during the variable display of the effect symbols, the first reserved information is updated before the frame update timing at which the second reserved information completes the increased display. It is possible to control so that the timing at which the information increases display is completed earlier (see FIG. 40), and during the execution of the specific effect, the second pending information is set to a non-display state, and the specific effect is completed, the return display of the second suspension information is executed, and the second suspension when the specific performance is completed than the execution period of the increase display of the second suspension information during the execution of the variable performance The execution period of the restoration display of information is made shorter (see FIGS. 42, 44, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, first judgment information or second judgment information is acquired by establishment of a first start condition or establishment of a second start condition, and a game is played based on the judgment information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first reservation storage (special storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second judgment information as a second reservation memory (special 2 reservation memory), and determining the judgment information before the special game judgment. A gaming machine comprising prior determination means and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variable effect in display means (image display devices 70, 71) in accordance with a signal from the main control means , A first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.) and a second state (time-saving game state, high-probability game state, etc.) more advantageous to the player than the first state. In the variable performance, the performance control means can make the performance pattern (the performance pattern 70a) recognizable, and can be in a recognizable display mode (temporary stop display) in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed. A first period (for example, the period during which all the production symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous production), when ready-to-win is established , during normal reach production, etc.), and a second period (during main stop display, during derived display) in which the production pattern can be stopped and displayed (main stop display, derived display). can be executed, the first state and the second state can be controlled so that the presentation mode during the first period is different, and the first suspension for displaying the suspended memory in the first display mode Information (first special reservation number, second special reservation number) and second reservation information (first reservation icon, second reservation icon), and when the first reserved memory increases in the second state, the first memory number (e.g., one) in the first reservation information to the second memory number (e.g., , 1), but it is possible to limit the increase display from the first stored number to the second stored number in the second pending information (see FIG. 46), Suggesting the possibility of executing the special game based on the determination of the prior determination means It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (icon change effect, continuous notice effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect), lamp change effect, etc.), and in the first state, the first state based on the first determination information. 1 pending information is displayed, and it is possible to execute the prefetch effect based on the determination of the first determination information by the prior determination means, and in the second state, based on the first determination information While the first pending information is displayed, the pre-reading effect based on the determination of the first determination information by the prior determination means is not executed (see FIGS. 8, 46, etc.). By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when a starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. Recognizable display (temporary stop display, main stop display, derived display) is performed to recognizably display, and a recognizable display (main stop display, derived display ), and when executing a first specific effect (normal reach effect, etc.), and a second specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) in which the expectation of the special game is higher than the first specific effect etc.), the display time of the recognizable display of the production pattern can be controlled to be different, and the recognition of the production pattern when performing the variable production of executing the second specific production During the display of the possible display, the first effect of a predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect symbol 70a, the effect in which the effect symbol 70a in FIGS. 141 (a) and (e) is displayed in a reduced size 141 (c) and (f) in which the production pattern 70a returns to its normal size, etc.), and a second production that is different from the first production (any fluctuation end suggesting production , a predetermined operation of the production pattern 70a, the production in which the production pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), and the production pattern 70a in FIGS. , and the variable performance includes a first variable performance for performing the second specific performance, and a special game without performing the first specific performance and the second specific performance. A second variable effect for notifying not to be executed, including first reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in a first display mode, and the reservation memory is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and second suspension information (first suspension icon, second suspension icon) can be displayed, and the suspension Memory increases, the first storage number (e.g., 1) in the first pending information to the second storage number (e.g., 1) is increased, but the The increase display from the first stored number to the second stored number is not executed until a predetermined condition (end of SP reach (SPSP reach) effect) is satisfied during the display of the recognizable display, and stored in the storage means. A specific number (for example, 4) greater than the predetermined number is stored in the storage means than the second variation effect performed when a predetermined number (for example, 1) of the reserved storage is stored. The execution time of the recognizable display of the performance pattern tends to be shorter in the second variable performance performed when the reserved memory is stored, and the predetermined number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means. At the time of the second variation performance performed when the special The execution time of the recognizable display of the effect pattern is the same. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. Recognizable display (temporary stop display, main stop display, derived display) is performed to recognizably display, and a recognizable display (main stop display, derived display ), and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (pseudo-continuous performance) that gradually improves the degree of expectation, and the case where the predetermined performance is executed and the predetermined performance is not executed, the display time of the recognizable display of the production pattern is different, and during the display of the recognizable display of the production pattern in the case of executing the predetermined production, the first of a predetermined mode Effect (any variation end suggesting effect, predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (a), and a second effect that is different from the first effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect symbol 70a, FIG. 141 (a) (e) effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, effect in which the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. The variable performance includes a first variable performance that performs a reach that suggests the possibility of executing the special game, and a second variable performance that notifies that the special game is not executed without performing the reach, First reservation information (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) for displaying the reservation memory in a first display mode, and displaying the reservation memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode. It is possible to display second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon), and the first pending information is changed from the first storage number (for example, two) to the second by the start of fluctuation of the production pattern. memory of 2 Decrease display to the number (for example, 1) is started, and before the second pending information completes the decrease display from the first stored number to the second stored number, the first effect and the second A third effect (reduced display without scrolling (see FIG. 42(b))) different from the effect can be executed, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending memories are stored in the storage means. The second variable effect performed when a specific number (for example, four) of the reserved storage that is larger than the predetermined number is stored in the storage means than the second variable effect performed when the second variable effect is performed. The execution time of the recognizable display of the performance pattern tends to be shorter in the 2-variation performance, and the second variation performance performed when the predetermined number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means. The execution time of the recognizable display of the special performance pattern is the same between the time and the time of the second variable performance performed when the specific number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means. I'm trying By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when a starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. Recognizable display (temporary stop display, main stop display, derived display) is performed to recognizably display, and a recognizable display (main stop display, derived display ), and the recognizable display of the production pattern is a first recognizable display (temporary stop display) that can be recognized that the production pattern is recognizable and is being displayed in a variable manner. , and a second recognizable display (main stop display, derivation display) in which the production pattern is stopped and displayed, and the production pattern becomes the first recognizable display a plurality of times during one fluctuation of the production pattern. A predetermined effect (pseudo continuous effect) can be executed, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the display time of the first recognizable display tends to be longer than when the predetermined effect is not executed. , the performance symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed in the mode of executing the special game, and during the display of the last recognizable display in the predetermined performance, the first performance of the predetermined mode (the end of any fluctuation Suggestive effect, predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in FIGS. ), and a second effect that is different from the first effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, a predetermined operation of the effect pattern 70a, and the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (a) (e) is displayed in a reduced size, the effect in which the effect pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (c) and (f) is returned to the normal size, etc.) and a second variable effect notifying that the special game is not executed without performing the reach, and the holding memory is in the first display mode. by The first reserved information (first special reserved number, second special reserved number) to be displayed, and the second reserved information (first A pending icon, a second pending icon) can be displayed, and the first pending information changes from the first stored number (for example, 2 pieces) to the second stored number (for example, 1), and before the second pending information that has started the variable effect completes the change display to the execution information (variable icon), the first effect and the second effect A third effect in a different mode (reduced display without scrolling (see FIG. 42(b))) can be executed, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending memories are stored in the storage means. The second variable effect performed when a specific number (for example, four) of the reserved storages larger than the predetermined number is stored in the storage means than the second variable effect performed when the second variable effect was performed. The execution time of the recognizable display of the effect pattern tends to be shorter, and the second variable effect performed when the predetermined number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means; The execution time of the recognizable display of the special effect pattern is the same as that of the second variable effect performed when the specific number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means. there is By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is satisfied, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. Recognizable display (temporary stop display, main stop display, derived display) is performed to recognizably display, and a recognizable display (main stop display, derived display ), and the recognizable display of the production pattern is a first recognizable display (temporary stop display) that can be recognized that the production pattern is recognizable and is being displayed in a variable manner. , and a second recognizable display (main stop display, derivation display) in which the production pattern is stopped and displayed, and the second recognizable display is in a mode different from the mode in which the special game is executed (indicating loss) There is a first mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a combination) and a second mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of executing the special game (combination indicating a big win), and the second recognition. When the possibility display is in the second mode, during the display of the first recognizable display, the first effect in a predetermined mode (any variation end suggesting effect, effect pattern Predetermined operation of 70a, production in which the production pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), production in which the production pattern 70a in FIGS. etc.), and a second effect different from the first effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e) is displayed in a reduced size 141 (c) (f), such as an effect in which the effect pattern 70a is returned to the normal size), and the like) are likely to be executed, and the variable effect increases the possibility of executing the special game. A first suspension for displaying the suspension memory in a first display mode, including a first variation performance for suggesting reach and a second variation performance for notifying that the special game is not executed without performing the reach. Information (No. 1 special insurance Display the second reservation information (first reservation icon, second reservation icon) for displaying the reservation memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode. It is possible, the display image can be updated on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and the second suspension information is the case where the suspension storage is decreased by one and the variable effect is started. When the pending memory increases during the change display to the execution information (variable icon) of the above, the first hold information starts increasing display even before the frame update timing at which the change display is completed. (See FIG. 42), and the storage means is more likely than the second variation performance performed when a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending storage is stored in the storage means. The execution time of the recognizable display of the production pattern is longer in the second variable production performed when a specific number (for example, 4) of the reserved memories larger than the predetermined number is stored in It tends to be short, and when the second variable effect is performed when the predetermined number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means, and the specific number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means. The execution time of the recognizable display of the special effect pattern is the same between when the second variable effect is performed at different times. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problems, determination information is acquired when the starting condition is established, and a special game determination is executed as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Possible main control means (main CPU 110a), storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as pending storage, and display means ( In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of executing a variable production in the image display devices 70, 71), the production control means controls production patterns (production patterns 70a) in the variable production. Recognizable display (temporary stop display, main stop display, derived display) is performed to recognizably display, and a recognizable display (main stop display, derived display ), and the recognizable display of the production pattern is a first recognizable display (temporary stop display) that can be recognized that the production pattern is recognizable and is being displayed in a variable manner. , and a second recognizable display (main stop display, derivation display) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and the second recognizable display is a mode in which the special game is not executed (a combination indicating a loss). There is a first mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed, and a second mode in which the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of executing the special game (a combination indicating a big win), and the second recognizable display is the above-mentioned. In the case of the first mode, compared to the case of the second mode, during the display of the first recognizable display, the first effect of the predetermined mode (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, the predetermined effect of the effect pattern 70a 141 (a) (e), the production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, the production pattern 70a in FIGS. 141 (c) (f) is displayed in a normal size, etc.), A second effect different from the first effect (any fluctuation end suggesting effect, a predetermined action of the effect symbol 70a, an effect in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in reduced size in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(e), (c) and (f), such as an effect in which the effect symbol 70a is returned to the normal size, etc.) are difficult to execute, and the variable effect is a reach that suggests the possibility of executing the special game. First suspension information (first Special reserved number, second Special figure pending number) and the second pending information (first pending icon, second pending icon) that displays the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode. The display image can be updated on the display means every time the frame update timing comes, and when the reserved memory increases during the variable display of the effect symbols, the second reserved information completes the increased display. It is controllable so that the timing at which the increase display of the first pending information is completed is earlier than the frame update timing (see FIG. 40), and a predetermined number (for example, one) is stored in the storage means. When a specific number (for example, 4) of the reserved memories greater than the predetermined number is stored in the storage means than the second variation performance performed when the reserved memories of are stored The execution time of the recognizable display of the effect pattern is likely to be shorter in the second variable effect performed at 12:00, and the second variable effect is performed when the predetermined number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means. During the second variable performance and during the second variable performance performed when the specific number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means, the recognizable display of the special performance pattern Execution time is made to be the same. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a thirtieth configuration for solving the above problems, first judgment information or second judgment information is acquired by establishment of a first start condition or establishment of a second start condition, and a game is played based on the judgment information. A main control means (main CPU 110a) capable of executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and storing the first determination information for which the special game determination has not been performed as a first reserved memory. Then, storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the second determination information as a second reserve memory, and display means (image display devices 70, 71) according to a signal from the main control means execute a variable effect. In a gaming machine provided with a possible effect control means (effect control board 130), a first state (non-time-saving game state, low-probability game state, etc.) and a second state that is more advantageous to the player than the first state state (time-saving gaming state, high-probability gaming state, etc.) can be controlled, and the production control means displays a recognizable display (temporary stop display, main stop display, derivation display), and recognizable display (main stop display, derivation display) for recognizably displaying the special effect symbol (special effect symbol TZ). The state and the second state can be controlled so that the performance mode during execution of the recognizable display of the performance pattern is different, and the variable performance is a reach suggesting the possibility of executing the special game. and a second variable effect for notifying that the special game is not executed without performing the reach, and the first pending information (the first 1 special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number), and second reservation information (first reservation icon, second reservation icon) that displays the reservation memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode , can be displayed, and when the first reserved memory increases in the second state, the first memory number (for example, 1) in the first reserved information to the second memory number (for example, 2) ), but it is possible to limit the increase display from the first stored number to the second stored number in the second pending information (see FIG. 46), and the storage means A specific number (for example, 4) greater than the predetermined number in the storage means than the second variation performance performed when a predetermined number (for example, 1) of the reserved storage is stored in the storage means The second variation effect performed when the reserved memory is stored is The execution time of the recognizable display of the production pattern is likely to be shortened, and when the second variable production is performed when the predetermined number of the reserved memories are stored in the storage means, and in the storage means The execution time of the recognizable display of the special performance pattern is the same as that of the second variable performance performed when the specific number of the reserved memories are stored. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the "first period" refers to the period during which all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (period of temporary stop display before main stop display, period of temporary stop display in pseudo continuous effect), reach At the time of establishment, during normal reach production, etc., there are cases where two periods that are not consecutive are combined as the first period (for example, at the time of establishment of reach and the period during which the temporary stop is displayed before the main stop display) combined period). In addition, the "first effect" is any effect indicating the end of fluctuation, a predetermined action of the effect pattern 70a, a effect in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in FIGS. 141 ( 141(c) and 141(f), in which the production pattern 70a is displayed in a normal size, and the like.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is assumed to shift to a high-probability game state over a predetermined number of times after all jackpot games are completed. In this case, the game machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to the game state.

In addition, when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the normal pattern, it is shifted to the low probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the specific pattern, the next game is played after the end of the jackpot game. The game machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority. However, the gaming machine may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel).

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 gaming machine 110 main control board 110a main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
130 production control board 130a sub CPU
130b Sub-ROM
130c sub-RAM
70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 70a, 5470a Production design TZ Special production design

Claims (1)

Main control means capable of acquiring determination information when a starting condition is satisfied and executing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information;
A storage means for storing the determination information for which the special game determination has not been executed as a pending storage;
detection means for detecting a predetermined event;
A game machine comprising a production control means capable of executing a variable production in the display means according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means is
Performing a predetermined control based on the input signal from the detection means,
The production control means is
a first period in which the effect pattern is recognizable in the variable effect, and a recognizable display mode in which it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed;
The stop effect can be executed by a second period in which the effect symbol can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode,
In the case of executing the first variable production that performs the first specific production and the case of executing the second variable production that carries out the second specific production with the higher expectation of the special game than the first specific production, the first the execution time of the period can be controlled to be different,
During the first period when executing the second variation production,
It is possible to execute a first effect in a predetermined mode and a second effect in a mode different from the first effect,
It is possible to display first pending information that displays the pending memory in a first display mode and second pending information that displays the pending memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode,
It is possible to execute a normal update display in which the second pending information is displayed in a shift manner according to the decrease in the pending storage and the second pending information is sequentially displayed in a decreasing order,
When the pending memory increases during execution of the second specific effect,
Executing an increase display from the first stored number to the second stored number in the first pending information,
display of the increased number from the first stored number to the second stored number in the second pending information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first period;
When the main control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state when power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined notification can be executed,
During the display of the second hold information of the third memory number which is two or more more than the first memory number, the signal at the start of the variable effect in which the reservation memory becomes the first memory number is received. case,
executing a specific update display for displaying a decrease from the third stored number to the first stored number in a decreasing manner different from the normal update display ,
In the specific update display,
The game machine characterized in that the shift display is performed so that the second reservation information is the first memory number without the shift display so that the second reservation information is the number one less than the third memory number. .

Images